► 


'  -     -'''■"'■■ 


MANUAL   OF  STYLE 


c 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


A  COMPILATION  OF  THE  TYPOGRAPHICAL  RULES 
IN  FORCE  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 
PRESS,    WITH     SPECIMENS    OF    TYPES     IN     USE 


Chicago 

The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

1910 


C  Cc 


Copyright  igo6  and  1910  By 
The  University  of  Chicago 


Published  November  1906 
Second  Edition  March  1910 


Composed  and  Printed  By 

The  University  o£  Chicago  Press 

Chicago,  Illinois,  U.S.A. 


PREFACE 

The  present  work  is  a  codification  of  the  typographical 
rules  and  practices  in  force  at  the  University  of  Chicago 
Press.  Having  its  genesis,  more  than  a  decade  ago,  in  a 
single  sheet  of  fundamentals,  jotted  down  at  odd  moments 
for  the  individual  guidance  of  the  first  proofreader;  added 
to  from  year  to  year,  as  opportunity  would  offer  or  new 
necessities  arise;  revised  and  re-revised  as  the  scope  of 
the  work,  and,  it  is  hoped,  the  wisdom  of  the  workers, 
increased — it  emerges  in  its  present  form  as  the  embodi- 
ment of  traditions,  the  crystallization  of  usages,  the  blended 
product  of  the  reflections  of  many  min(ds. 

Rules  and  regulations  such  as  these,  in  the  nature  of 
the  case,  cannot  be  endowed  with  the  fixity  of  rock-ribbed 
law.  They  are  meant  for  the  average  case,  and  must  be 
applied  with  a  certain  degree  of  elasticity.  Exceptions 
will  constantly  occur,  and  ample  room  is  left  for  individual 
initiative  and  discretion.  They  point  the  way  and  survey 
the  road,  rather  than  remove  the  obstacles.  Throughout 
this  book  it  is  assumed  that  no  regulation  contained  therein 
is  absolutely  inviolable.  Wherever  the  peculiar  nature  of 
the  subject-matter,  the  desirability  of  throwing  into  relief 
a  certain  part  of  the  argument,  the  reasonable  preference 
of  a  writer,  or  a  typographical  contingency  suggests  a 
deviation,  such  deviation  may  legitimately  be  made.  Each 
case  of  this  character  must  largely  be  decided  upon  its 


236714 
I 


VI  PREFACE 


own  merits.  Generally  it  may  be  stated  that,  where  no 
question  of  good  taste  or  good  logic  is  involved,  defer- 
ence should  be  shown  to  the  expressed  wishes  of  the 
author. 

The  nature  of  the  work  of  the  Press  itself — and  this 
will  apply,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  to  any  similar  in- 
stitution affected  by  local  conditions — constantly  calls  for 
modification,  now  of  this  rule,  now  of  that.  It  would  be 
found  impracticable,  even  were  it  desirable,  to  bring  all 
of  its  publications  into  rigid  uniformity  of  "style"  and 
appearance.  Methods  have  been  devised,  systems  evolved, 
in  certain  lines  of  work,  which  cannot  bodily  be  carried 
over  into  the  field  of  others.  Thus,  in  the  matter  of  literary 
references,  for  instance,  general  practice  has  established 
certain  usages  in  some  of  the  sciences  which  it  would  not 
be  advisable  to  ignore.  Similar  discrepancies  may  be  ob- 
served in  other  directions.  These  deviations  will  be  found 
mentioned  at  the  appropriate  places  in  the  body  of  the 
book.  On  the  whole,  however,  the  rules  are  designed  to 
govern  all  publications  sent  forth  with  the  imprint  of  this 
Press. 

Concerning  the  character  and  contents  of  the  book 
little  need  be  added.  Its  origin,  its  primary  aim,  and  its 
limitations,  as  outlined  above,  will  suggest  the  bounds  of 
its  usefulness.  It  does  not  pretend  to  be  exhaustive;  a 
few  things  must  be  taken  for  granted,  and  the  traditional 
territory  of  the  dictionary  has  only  exceptionally  been 
invaded.  It  does  not  presume  to  be  inflexibly  consistent; 
applicability,  in  the  printing-office,  is  a  better  test  than 


PREFACE  VI 1 


iron-clad  consistency,  and  common-sense  a  safer  guide 
than  abstract  logic.  It  lays  no  claim  to  perfection  in  any 
of  its  parts;  bearing  throughout  the  inevitable  earmarks 
of  compromise,  it  will  not  carry  conviction  at  every  point 
to  everybody.  Neither  is  it  an  advocate  of  any  radical 
scheme  of  reform;  in  the  present  state  of  the  agitation  for 
the  improvement  of  spelling,  progressive  conservatism  has 
been  thought  to  be  more  appropriate  for  an  academic 
printing-ofhce  than  radicalism.  As  it  stands,  this  Manual 
is  believed  to  contain  a  fairly  comprehensive,  reasonably 
harmonious,  and  wholesomely  practical  set  of  work-rules 
for  the  aid  of  those  whose  duties  bring  them  into  direct 
contact  with  the  Manufacturing  Department  of  the  Press. 
If,  in  addition  to  this  its  main  object,  this  Manual  of  Style 
may  incidentally  prove  helpful  to  other  gropcrs  in  the 
■labyrinths  of  typographical  style,  its  purpose  will  have 
been  abundantly  realized. 
August  15,  1906 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION 

The  first  edition  of  the  Manual  of  Style  represented 
the  developed  form  of  the  numerous  typographical  rules 
which  had  been  in  process  of  formation  and  growth  at  the 
University  of  Chicago  Press  for  ten  years.  This  second 
edition,  issued  more  than  three  years  later,  reflects  their 
continued  development.  Changes  in  literary  practice, 
the  legislation  of  learned  societies,  the  recent  development 
of  the  profession  of  librarian,  with  the  attendant  uniformity 
of  practice  recommended  by  the  national  association  of 
librarians,  and  the  added  experience  resulting  from  a  daily 
application  of  these  rules  to  a  very  varied  list  of  publica- 
tions at  the  University  of  Chicago  Press,  are  all  factors, 
contributing  to  the  need  of  revision. 

This  second  edition  is,  therefore,  new  mainly  in  the 
sense  that  it  contains  additional  rules — some  entirely  new, 
some  designed  to  elucidate  or  to  extend  old  ones — but  all 
representing  what  is  believed  to  be  the  best  and  most 
advanced  practice.  The  principal  changes  and  additions 
may  be  said  to  consist  of:  the  method  of  citing  references 
in  footnotes  and  bibliographies;  an  extension  of  the  list 
of  words  whose  spelling  offers  a  choice  of  practice;  a 
summarization  of  the  rules  of  scientific  societies  for  the 
treatment  of  generic  and  specific  names;  a  few  additional 
rules  affecting  capitalization;  rules  for  indexing;  a  few 
slight  modifications  in  the  rules  for  punctuation.     There 

viii 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION  ix 


are  also  many  minor  changes  and  additions,  scarcely  worth 
mentioning  in  detail.  Illustrations  of  rules  are  put  after 
each  division  of  the  rule,  rather  than  collectively  as  in  the 
first  edition,  in  the  belief  that  this  practice  contributes  to 
clearness  and  ease  of  understanding. 

The  new  edition  will,  it  is  hoped,  prove  of  use  to  a  wide 
circle  outside  of  the  ofhce  of  the  University  of  Chicago 
Press.  The  merit  of  the  Manual  is  best  evidenced  by  its 
very  general  adoption  and  use  in  editorial  ofhces  and 
proofrooms  throughout  the  United  States  and  Canada, 
and  the  remodeled  work  is  now  again  offered  to  a  public, 
which,  at  the  time  of  the  first  edition,  was  not  expected  to 
make  such  general  use  of  the  book  as  later  proved  to  be 
the  case. 

Apkil  I,   1910 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Rules  for  Composition i 

Capitalization 3 

The  Use  of  Italics 23 

Quotations 28 

Spelling 32 

Punctuation 43 

Divisions 72 

Footnotes 75 

Indexing         79 

Tabular  Work 81 

Technical  Terms 85 

Appendix        99 

Hints  to  Authors  and  Editors loi 

Hints  to  Proofreaders 105 

Hints  to  Copyholders 108 

Proofreader's  Marks m 

Index 113 

Specimens  of  Types  in  Use 


XI 


RULES  FOR   COMPOSITION 


CAPITALIZATION 

Capitalize — 

1.  Proper  nouns  and  adjectives  derived  from  proper 

nouns: 

George,  America,  North  America,  Englishman;  Elizabethan, 
French.     (See  53.) 

But  do  not  capitalize  verbs  derived   from  proper 

names : 

to  boycott,  to  fletcherize,  to  christianize,  to  pasteurize. 

2.  Epithets  used  as  substitutes  for  proper  names,  or 
affixed  to  a  name : 

the  Pretender,  Richard  the  Lion-hearted,  Alexander  the 
Great. 

3.  The  particles  in  French  names,  as  "le,"  "la,"  "de," 
"du,"  when  standing  without  a  Christian  name  or 
title  preceding;  but  not  when  preceded  by  such 
name  or  title: 

Le  Bossu,  La  Torre,  La  Rochelle,  De  Coligny,  D'Aubigne, 
Du  Maurier  (but:  Rene  le  Bossu,  Miguel  de  la  Torre, 
Gaspard  de  Coligny,  Thomas  d'Aubigne,  George  du  Maurier, 
Monsieur  de  la  Torre,  le  comte  de  Nemours,  le  due  d'Orleans). 

Always  capitalize  "Van"  in  Dutch  names;  never 
capitalize  "von"  in  German  names: 

Stephen  Van  Rensselaer,  Hugo  von  Martins,  von  Dobschiitz. 

3 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Generic  terms  forming  a  part  of  geographical  names : 

Atlantic  Ocean,  Dead  Sea,  Baffin's  Bay,  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
Straits  of  Gibraltar,  Straits  Settlements,  Mississippi  River, 
Three  Rivers,  Laughing  Brook,  Rocky  Mountains,  Blue 
Hills,  Pike's  Peak,  Mount  of  Olives,  Great  Desert,  Death 
Valley,  Prince  Edward  Island,  Sea  (Lake)  of  Galilee. 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  of  this  class  when  simply 
added  by  way  of  description  to  the  specific  name, 
without  forming  an  organic  part  of  such  name: 

the  river  Elbe,  the  desert  of  Sahara,  the  island  of  Madagascar. 

Adjectives  and  nouns  used  singly  or  in  conjunction, 
to  distinguish  definite  regions  or  parts  of  the  world: 

Old  World,  Western  Hemisphere,  North  Pole,  Equator, 
the  North  (  =  Scandinavia),  the  East  (the  Orient),  the  Far 
East,  the  Orient,  the  Levant;  the  North,  South,  East,  West 
(United  States). 

But  do  not,  as  a  rule,  capitalize  adjectives  derived 

from  such  names,  or  nouns  having  an  adjectival 

form,    or    nouns    simply    designating    direction    or 

point  of  compass: 

oriental  customs,  the  orientals,  northern  Europe,  the  southern 
states,  a  southerner  (but:  Northman = Scandinavian);  an 
invasion  of  barbarians  from  the  north,  extending  through  the 
south  of  Europe. 

Generic  terms  for  political  divisions: 

(i)  when  the  term  is  an  organic  part  of  the  name, 

following  the  proper  name  directly : 

Holy  Roman  Empire,  German  Empire  {  =  Dcutsches  Reich), 
French  Republic  {  =  Re puhliquc  jran(aise).  United  Kingdom, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  5 

Northwest  Territory,  Cook  County,  Evanston  Township, 
Kansas  City  (New  York  City — exception). 

(2)  when,  with  the  preposition  "of,"  it  is  used  as 
an  integral  part  of  the  name  to  indicate  certain 
minor  administrative  subdivisions  in  the  United 
States: 

Department  of  the  Lakes,  Town  of  Lake,  Borough  of  Man- 
hattan. 

(3)  when  used  singly  as  the  accepted  designation 

for  a  specific  division: 

the  Union,  the  States,  the  Republic  (  =  United  States),  [the 
Confederacy],  the  Dominion  (  =  Canada). 

(4)  when  it  is  part  of  a  fanciful  or  popular  appel- 
lation used  as  if  a  real  geographical  name: 

Celestial  Empire,  Holy  (Promised)  Land,  Badger  State, 
Eternal  City,  Garden  City. 

But  do  not  (with  the  exceptions  noted)  capitalize  such 

terms   when    standing   alone,  or  when,  with  "of," 

preceding  the  specific  name: 

the  empire,  the  state;  empire  of  Russia,  kingdom  of  Bel- 
gium, [kingdom  of  God,  or  of  heaven],  duchy  of  Anhalt, 
state  of  Illinois,  county  of  Cook,  city  of  Chicago. 

7.  Numbered  political  divisions: 

Eleventh  Congressional  District,  First  Ward,  Second  Precinct. 

8.  The  names  of  thoroughfares,  parks,  squares,  bloclcs, 

buildings,  etc.: 

Drexel  Avenue,  Ringstrasse,  Via  Appia,  Chicago  Drainage 
Canal;  Lincoln  Park;  Trafalgar  Square;  Monadnock  Block; 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Lakeside  Building,  Capitol,  White  House,  County  Hospital, 
Theatre  Fran^ais,  Lexington  Hotel,  Masonic  Temple, 
[Solomon's  temple,  but,  when  standing  alone:    the  Temple]. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general  designations  of 
buildings  as  "courthouse,"  "post-office,"  "library," 
etc.,  except  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  place 
in  which  they  are  located. 

9.  The  names  of  political  parties,  religious  denomina- 
tions or  sects,  and  philosophical,  literary,  and  artistic 
schools,  and  their  adherents: 

Republican,  Conservative,  National  Liberal,  Social  Democ- 
racy (where,  as  in  continental  Europe,  it  is  organized  as 
a  distinct  parliamentary  faction);  Christian,  Protestantism, 
Evangelical  Lutheran,  Catholic  (Papist,  Ultramontane),  Re- 
formed, Greek  Orthodox,  Methodism,  Anabaptist,  Seventh- 
Day  Adventists,  the  Establishment,  High  Church  (High 
Churchman,  but:  nonconformist,  dissenter),  Christian 
Science,  Theosophist,  Jew  (but:  gentile),  Pharisee  (but: 
scribe);  Epicurean,  Stoic,  Gnosticism  (but:  neo-Platonism, 
pseudo-Christianity — see  208),  Literalist;  the  Romantic 
movement;    the  Symbolic  school  of  painters. 

But  do  not  capitalize  any  of  the  above  or  similar 
words,  or  their  derivatives,  when  used  in  their  origi- 
nal or  acquired  general  sense  of  pervading  spirit, 
point  of  view,  trend  of  thought,  attitude  of  mind,  or 
mode  of  action : 

republican  form  of  government,  a  true  democrat  and  a  con- 
servative statesman,  socialism  as  an  economic  panacea,  the 
communistic  theory,  single-taxer,  anarchism;  catholicity  of 
mind,  puritanical  ideas,  evangelical  spirit,  pharisaic  super- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  7 

ciliousness;  deist,  pantheism,  rationalist;  epicurean  tastes, 
stoic  endurance,  dualism  and  monism  in  present-day  philoso- 
phy, an  altruistic  world-view;   the  classics,  a  realistic  novel. 

10.  The  names  of  monastic  orders  and  their  members: 
Black  Friars,  Dominican,  Jesuit. 

11.  The  proper  (official)  titles  of  social,  religious,  educa- 
tional, political,  commercial,  and  industrial  organiza- 
tions and  institutions: 

Union  League  Club,  Knights  Templar;  Young  People's 
Society  of  Christian  Endeavor,  Associated  Charities;  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  State  University  of  Iowa,  Hyde  Park  High 
School;  the  Commercial  Academy  (Handelsakademie)  of 
Leipzig,  the  Paris  Lyceum  (Lycee  de  Paris) ;  [the  Forty  Im- 
mortals]; Cook  County  Democracy,  Tammany  Hall;  Asso- 
ciated Press,  Typographical  Union  No.  i6;  Chicago,  Mil- 
waukee &  St.  Paul  Railroad,  The  Macmillan  Company. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  generic  terms  when  used 

to  designate  a  class;  nor  when  standing  alone,  even 

if  applied  to  a  specific  institution,  except  to  avoid 

ambiguity  or,  rarely,  where  the  word  is  consistently 

and  clearly  used  in  place  of  the  true  name: 

young  people's  societies,  the  high  school  at  Lemont,  local 
typographical  unions;  the  club,  the  association,  the  company; 
but:  "He  joined  the  Hall  [Tammany],"  "a  member  of  the 
[French]  Academy."     (See  49.) 

12.  The  names  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and  administra- 
tive bodies  and  governmental  departments,  and  their 
branches,  when  specifically  applied: 

Congress  (Senate,  House  of  Representatives  [the  House], 
Committee   of  Ways   and   Means),   Parliament   (House   of 


8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Lords,  House  of  Commons),  Reichstag,  Chamber  of  Deputies 
(the  Chamber),  General  Assembly  of  Illinois,  Chicago  City 
Council,  South  Park  Commissioners;  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States,  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County,  [Sanhedrin]; 
Department  of  the  Interior,  Census  Office,  Springfield  Board 
of  Education,  Department  of  Public  Works. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general,  paraphrastic,  or 
incomplete  designations  as — 

the  national  assembly,  the  legislature  of  the  state,  the  upper 
house  of  Congress,  the  German  federal  parliament,  the 
Dutch  diet;   the  council,  the  department,  the  board. 

13.  Ordinals  used  to  designate  Egyptian  dynasties, 
sessions  of  Congress,  names  of  regiments,  and  in 
similar  connections: 

the  Eighteenth  Dynasty,  the  Fifty-third  Congress,  the  Second 
Illinois  Regiment  Band. 

14.  Commonly  accepted  appellations  for  historical 
epochs,  periods  in  the  history  of  a  language  or 
literature,  and  geological  ages  and  strata: 

Stone  Age,  Middle  Ages,  Crusades,  Renaissance,  Reforma- 
tion, Inquisition,  Commonwealth  (Cromwell's),  Commune 
(Paris);  Old  English  (OE— see  123),  Middle  High  German 
(MHG),  the  Age  of  Elizabeth;  Pleistocene,  Silurian,  Lower 
Carboniferous. 

15.  Names  for  important  events: 

Thirty  Years'  War,  Peasants'  War  (German),  Revolution 
(French),  Revolutionary  War  or  War  of  Independence 
(American),  Whiskey  Insurrection  (American),  Civil  War 
(American),  War  of  1812,  Franco-Prussian  War,  Battle  of 
Gettysburg;  Peace  of  Utrecht,  Louisiana  Purchase. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  9 

16.  Political  alliances,  and  such  terms  from  secular  or 
ecclesiastical  history  as  have,  through  their  associa- 
tions, acquired  special  significance  as  designations 
for  parties,  classes,  movements,  etc.  (see  9) : 

Protestant  League,  Holy  Alliance,  Dreibund;  the  Roses,  the 
Roundheads,  Independents,  Independency  (English  history) 
(but:   nonconformist). 

17.  Conventions,  congresses,  expositions,  etc.: 

Council  of  Nicaea,  Parliament  of  Religions,  Fifteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Criminology,  Westminster  Assembly, 
Chicago  "World's  Fair,  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition. 

18.  Titles   of   specific    treaties,    acts,    laws    (juridical), 

bills,  etc.: 

Treaty  of  Verdun,  Art.  V  of  the  Peace  of  Prague,  Edict  of 
Nantes,  Concordat,  the  Constitution  (of  the  United  States; 
when  standing  alone,  or  when  referred  to  as  a  literary  docu- 
ment; but  not  usually  that  of  any  other  state  or  country,  e.g., 
the  constitution  of  Illinois),  Declaration  of  Independence, 
Act  of  Emancipation,  Magna  Carta,  Corn  Law,  Reform 
Bill  (English),  Fourteenth  Amendment. 

19.  Creeds  and  confessions  of  faith: 

Apostles'  Creed,  Nicene  Creed  (but:  ante-Nicene — see  208), 
Augsburg  Confession,  Thirty-nine  Articles. 

20.  Civic  and  ecclesiastical  feast-days: 

Fourth  of  July  (the  Fourth),  Labor  Day,  Thanksgiving  Day; 
Easter,  Passover,  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  New  Year's  Day 
(but:  sabbath  =  day  of  rest). 

21.  Titles,  civil  and  military,  preceding  the  name,  and 
academic  degrees,   in  abbreviated  form,   following 


lo  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


the  name;  all  titles  of  honor  or  of  nobility,  when 
referring  to  specific  persons,  either  with  the  name 
attached  or  used  in  place  of  the  proper  name; 
familiar  names  applied  to  particular  persons;  orders 
(decorations)  and  the  titles  accompanying  them; 
titles,  without  the  name,  used  in  direct  address; 
titles  without  the  name  when  used  of  existing  incum- 
bents of  office;  and  such  words  as  "President," 
"King,"  "Czar"  ("Tsar"),  "Kaiser,"  "Sultan," 
and  "Pope,"  standing  alone,  when  referring  to  the 
existing  rulers  or  incumbents: 

Queen  Victoria,  ex-President  Cleveland,  Rear-Admiral 
Dewey,  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education  Harris,  Dr. 
Davis;  Timothy  Dwight,  D.D.,  LL.D.;  tlie  Prince  of  Wales, 
the  Marquis  of  Lome,  His  Majesty,  His  Grace;  the  Apostle 
to  the  Gentiles,  "the  Father  of  his  Country";  order  of  the 
Red  Eagle,  Knight  Commander  of  the  Bath;  "Allow  me  to 
suggest,  Judge  .  .  .  .";  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury;  the 
Bishop  of  London;  the  Senator;  "The  President  [of  the 
United  States]  was  chosen  arbitrator,"  "  the  King  wore  his 
robes,"  "the  Kaiser's  Moroccan  policy,"  "the  Pope's  atti- 
tude toward  the  French  Republic." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  tides  of  occupants  of  actu- 
ally existing  offices,  when  following  the  name  (see 
49) ;  when  standing  alone,  without  name  (with  the 
exceptions  noted  above,  and  see  49) ;  or  when,  fol- 
lowed by  the  name,  they  are  preceded  by  the  article 
"the": 

McKinley,  president  of  the  United  States;  B.  L.  Gildersleeve, 
professor  of  Greek  (see  49);    Ferdinand  W.  Peck,  commis- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  ii 

sioner-general  to  the  Paris  Exposition;  the  emperor  of 
Germany  (meaning  other  than  the  existing  emperor), 
the  archbishop  (meaning  other  than  the  existing  incumbent), 
the  senator  (when  not  speaking  of  the  existing  member), 
the  archduke  Francis  Ferdinand,  the  apostle  Paul. 

22.  Abbreviations  like  Ph.D.,  M.P.,  and  F.R.G.S.  (such 

titles  to  be  set  without  space  between  the  letters). 

(See  52,   103,   106.)     But  do  not  capitalize  such 

phrases  when  spelled  out  (but  see  25): 

doctor  of  philosophy,  fellow  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society. 

23.  Abbreviations  consisting  of  one  letter  only,  except 
in  case  of  units  of  measurement  and  minor  literary 
subdivisions  (see  54,  55,  no,  iii): 

R.V.    (Revised    Version),    C.  (centigrade),    L.C.M.    (lowest 

o  o 

common  multiple),  H. P.  (horse-power),  A. U.  (Angstrom  units). 

24.  Nouns  and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the  Supreme 
Being  or  Power,  or  any  member  of  the  Christian 
Trinity;  and  all  pronouns  referring  to  the  same, 
when  not  closely  preceded  or  followed  by  a  dis- 
tinctive name,  or  unless  such  reference  is  otherwise 
perfectly  clear: 

the  Almighty,  Ruler  of  the  universe,  the  First  Cause,  the 
Absolute,  Providence  (personified).  Father,  Son,  Holy  Ghost, 
the  Spirit,  Savior,  Messiah,  Son  of  Man,  the  Logos,  [and 
the  Virgin  Mary];  "Trust  Him  who  rules  all  things"  (but: 
"When  God  had  worked  six  days,  he  rested  on  the  seventh"). 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  and  deriva- 
tives as — 


12  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


(God's)  fatherhood,  (Jesus')  sonship,  messiahship,  messianic 
hope,  christological  (but:   Christology). 

25.  Words  which  have  an  acquired,  limited,  or  special 


meaning : 


the  Doctor's  degree;  a  report  of  the  Master  (in  chancery); 
a  Bachelor's  hood;  a  Freshman. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  as — 

the  doctorate,  a  master  in  chancery  (the  last  two  words  being 
explanatory,  the  capitalization  of  "master"  is  here  no  longer 
necessary  to  indicate  a  special  meaning). 

26.  "Nature"   and  similar  terms,  and  abstract  ideas, 

when  personified: 

"Nature  wields  her  scepter  mercilessly";  "Vice  in  the  old 
English  morality  plays." 

27.  "Father"  used  for  church  father,  and  "reformers" 
used  of  Reformation  leaders,  whenever  the  meaning 
otherwise  would  be  ambiguous: 

the  Fathers,  the  early  Fathers,  the  Greek  Fathers,  [Pilgrim 
Fathers],  the  Reformers  (but:  the  church  reformers  of  the 
fifteenth  century). 

28.  The  word  "church"  in  properly  cited  titles  of 
nationally  organized  bodies  of  believers  in  which, 
through  historical  associations,  it  has  become  insepa- 
rably linked  with  the  name  of  a  specific  locality;  or 
when  forming  part  of  the  name  of  a  particular 
edifice : 

Church  of  Rome,  Church  of  England,  High  Church;  Church 
of  the  Holy  Sepulcher,  Fifth  Avenue  Baptist  Church,  First 
Methodist  Church. 


T^IANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  13 


But  do  not  capitalize,  except  as  noteci  above,  when 
standing  alone,  in  any  sense — universal,  national, 
local — or  when  the  name  is  not  correctly  or  fully 
quoted : 

the  church  (  =  organized  Christianity),  the  Eastern  (Greek 
Orthodox)  church,  the  Roman  Catholic  church,  the  estab- 
lished church  (but:  the  Establishment),  the  state  church;  the 
Baptist  church  in  Englewood. 

Note. — In  exceptional  cases,  where  the  opposition  of  Church 
and  State  constitutes  a  fundamental  part  of  the  argument,  and 
it  is  desired  to  lend  force  to  this  antithesis,  emphasis  may  be  added 
by  capitalizing  the  two  words.     (See  Preface  to  first  edition.) 

29.  Names  for  the  Bible  and  other  sacred  books: 

(Holy,  Sacred)  Scriptures,  Holy  Writ,  Word  of  God,  Book  of 
Books;  Koran,  Vedas,  Mishna,  the  Upanishads;   Apocrypha. 

But  do  not  capitalize  adjectives  derived  from  such 

nouns: 

biblical,  scriptural,  koranic,  vedic,  talmudic,  apocryphal. 

30.  Versions  of  the  Bible: 

King  James's  Version,  Authorized  Version  (A.V.),  Revised 
Version  (R.V.),  Polychrome  Bible,  Septuagint  (LXX), 
Peshitto. 

31.  Books  and  divisions  of  the  Bible  and  of  other  sacred 

books : 

Old  Testament,  Pentateuch,  Exodus,  II  (Second)  Kings, 
Book  of  Job,  Psalms  (Psalter),  the  [Mosaic]  Law  and  the 
[writings  of  the]  Prophets,  Minor  Prophets,  Wisdom  Literature, 
Gospel  of  Luke,  Synoptic  Gospels,  Fourth  Gospel,  Acts  of 
the  Aposdes  (the  Acts),  Epistle  to  the  Romans,  Pastoral 
Epistles,  Apocalypse   (Revelation),   Sermon  on   the  Mount, 


14  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Beatitudes,  Lord's  Prayer,  Ten  Commandments  (Decalogue), 
Judith,  Bel  and  the  Dragon. 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  like  "book,"  "gospel," 
"epistle,"  "psalm"  in  such  connections  as — 

the  five  books  of  Moses,  the  first  forty  psalms,  the  gospels 
and  epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  [the  synoptic  problem, 
the  synoptists],  the  biblical  apocalypses. 

32.  Biblical  parables: 

the  parable  of  the  Prodigal  Son. 

33.  Such  miscellaneous  terms  as — 

Last  Supper,  Eucharist,  the  Passion,  the  Twelve  (apostles), 
the  Seventy  (disciples),  the  Serv^ant,  the  Day  of  Yahweh,  the 
Chronicler,  the  Psalmist,  the  Golden  Rule. 

34.  The  first  word  of  a  sentence,  and  in  poetry  the  first 
word  of  each  line: 

In  summer,  on  the  headlands, 

The  Baltic  Sea  along, 
Sits  Neckan,  with  his  harp  of  gold. 

And  sings  his  plaintive  song. 

In  Greek  and  Latin  poetry,  however,  capitalize  only 
the  first  word  of  a  paragraph,  not  of  each  verse 
(line) : 

Toto-t  8'  dotSo?  aetSe  irepiKXvTO'i.  01  St  (Tiu)irrj 
eiar'  aKOuovres'  o  8'  'A;!^utoiv  voiTTov  aeioev, 
Xvjfiov.  ov  iK  TpoLr]<;  eTreret'Auro  HuXAa?  ^ Kdrjvq. 
rov  8'  vircpoiioOtv  cf^peal  (rvvdero  9i(nnv  aoiorjv 
KOvpr]    iKopLOLO,  TrepL(f>po}v  Yl7]veXoTreia' 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  15 

Talia  praefantes  quondam  felicia  Pelei 

carmina  diuino  cecinerunt  pectore  Parcae  ^ 

praesentes:  namque  ante  domos  inuisere  castas 

heroum  et  sese  mortali  ostendere  coetu 

caelicolae  nondum  spreta  pietate  solebant. 

35.  The  first  word  after  a  colon  only  when  introducing 
a  complete  passage,  or  sentence  which  would  have 
independent  meaning,  as  in  summarizations  and 
quotations  not  closely  connected  with  what  precedes; 
or  where  the  colon  has  the  weight  of  such  expres- 
sion as  "as  follows,"  "namely,"  " for  instance,"  or 
a  similar  phrase,  and  is  followed  by  a  logically  com- 
plete sentence: 

"In  conclusion  I  wish  to  say:  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above 
that  .  .  .  .";  "As  the  old  proverb  has  it:  'Haste  makes 
waste'";  "My  theory  is:  The  moment  the  hot  current  strikes 
the  surface  .  .  .  ." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  first  word  of  a  quotation  if 
immediately  connected  with  what  precedes  (unless, 
as  the  first  word  of  a  sentence,  beginning  a  paragraph 
in  reduced  type);  or  the  first  word  after  a  colon,  if 
an  implied  "namely,"  or  a  similar  term,  is  followed 
by  a  brief  explanatory  phrase,  logically  dependent 
upon  the  preceding  clause;  or  if  the  colon  signal- 
izes a  note  of  comment: 

"The  old  adage  is  true  that  'haste  makes  waste'";  "Two 
explanations  present  themselves:  either  he  came  too  late  for 
the  train,  or  he  was  detained  at  the  station";  "We  could  not 
prevail  upon  the  natives  to  rccross  the  stream:  so  great  was 
their  superstition." 


1 6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

36.  As  a  rule,  the  first  word  in  sections  of  enumeration, 
if  any  one  link  contains  two  or  more  distinct  clauses 
(not  inclosed  in  parentheses),  separated  by  a  semi- 
colon, colon,  or  period,  unless  all  are  dependent 
upon  the  same  term  preceding  and  leading  up  to 
them : 

"His  reasons  for  refusal  were  three:  (i)  He  did  not  have  the 
time.  (2)  He  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any  rate,  had  no 
funds  available  at  the  moment.  (3)  He  doubted  the  feasi- 
bility of  the  plan."  But:  "He  objected  that  (i)  he  did  not 
have  the  time;  (2)  he  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any 
rate,  had  no  funds  available;  (3)  he  doubted  the  feasibility 
of  the  plan."     (See  138.) 

37.  As  a  rule,  nouns  followed  by  a  numeral — particu- 
larly a  capitalized  Roman  numeral — indicating 
their  order  in  a  sequence: 

Room  16,  Ps.  20,  Grade  IV,  Act  I,  Vol.  I,  No.  2,  Book  II, 
Div.  Ill,  Part  IV. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  minor  subdivisions  of 

publications  as — 

sec.  4,  scene  i,  art.  iii,  art.  "Evidence,"  chap.  2  (ii),  p.  7 
(vii),  vs.  II,  1.  5,  n.  6.     (See  no.) 

38.  The  first  word  of  a  cited  speech  (thought)  in  direct 
discourse,  whether  preceded  by  a  colon  or  a  comma 
(on  this  see  131) : 

"On  leaving  he  remarked:  'Never  shall  I  forget  this  day'"; 
"With  the  words,  'Never  shall  I  forget  this  day,'  he  departed"; 
"I  thought  to  myself:  This  day  I  shall  never  forget"  (without 
quotation  marks). 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  17 

39.  In  resolutions,  the  first  words  following  "Whereas" 
and  "Resolved'': 

Whereas,  It  has  pleased  God  .  .  .  .  ;  therefore  be  it 
Resolved,  That  .... 

40.  The  exclamations  "O"  and  "Oh"  (see  117): 

"OLord!"  "I  know  not,  Oh,  I  know  not!"  "Oh,  that  I 
were  home  again!" 

41.  All  the  principal  words  (i.e.,  nouns,  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs,  verbs,  first  and  last  words)  in 
English  titles  of  publications  (books,  pamphlets,  doc- 
uments, periodicals,  reports,  proceedings,  etc.),  and 
their  divisions  (parts,  chapters,  sections,  poems,  arti- 
cles, etc.) ;  in  subjects  of  lectures,  papers,  toasts,  etc. ; 
in  cap-and-small-cap  and  italic  center-heads  (T^oth 
of  which,  however,  should  be  avoided),  and  bold- 
face cut-in  heads  and  side-heads;  in  cap-and-small- 
cap  box-heads  in  tables  (see  279-82) : 

The  Men  Who  Made  the  Nation;  The  American  College — 
Its  Past  and  Present;  the  Report  oj  the  Committee  of  Nine; 
"In  the  Proceedings  0}  the  National  Education  Association 
for  1907  there  appeared  a  paper  entitled,  'The  Financial 
Value  of  Education.'" 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  capitalizes  only  first  words 
and  proper  names;  and  the  practice  may  properly  be  followed  in 
"narrow  measure"  (double  column)  bibliographies,  such  as  that 
in  the  department,  "New  Publications,"  in  the  Journal  of  Political 
Economy.  This  style  is  very  generally  followed  by  librarians  and 
others  in  the  compilation  of  lists  of  books  and  publications. 

42.  In  foreign  titles,  in  addition  to  capitalizing  the  first 
word,  follow  these  general  rules: 


1 8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


a)  In  Latin,  capitalize  proper  nouns,  and  adjectives 

derived  therefrom: 

Dc  amicitia,   Bclluni  Gallicum. 

h)   In  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  and  Scandinavian 

titles,   capitalize  proper  nouns  but  not  adjectives 

derived  therefrom: 

Histoire  de  la  Ulterature  jrangaise,  Novelle  e  racconti  popolari 

italiani,  Antologia  de  poetas  liricos  castcllanos,  Svenska  littera- 

turens  historie. 

c)  In  German  and  Danish,  capitalize  all  nouns  but 

not  the  adjectives,  except.German  adjectives  derived 

from  the  name  of  persons: 

Geschichte  des  deutschm  Feudalwesens  (but:    die  Homerische 
Frage),  Fremskridt  i  der  nittende  Aarhnndrede. 

d)  In  Dutch,  capitalize  all  nouns,  and  all  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  nouns: 

Geschiedenis  del  N ederlandsche  Taal. 

43.  In  mentioning  tides  of  newspapers  and  magazines 
do  not,  as  a  rule,  treat  the  definite  article  as  part  of 
the  title: 

the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  School  Review. 

44.  Titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  (singular,  MS;  plural, 
MSS): 

Codex  Bemensis,  Cod.  Canonicianus. 

45.  In  titles  with  the  main  words  capitalized,  all  nouns 
forming  parts  of  hyphenated  compounds: 
"Twentieth-Century   Progress,"    "The  Economy  of  High- 
Speed  Trains." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  19 


But  do  not  capitalize  such  components  when  other 
than  nouns: 

Fifty-first  Street,  "Lives  of  Well-known  Authors,"  "World- 
Dominion  of  English-speaking  Peoples." 

46.  In  botanical,  geological,  and  zoological  matter, 
the  scientific  (Latin)  names  of  divisions,  orders, 
families,  and  genera;  also  in  botanical  and  zoological 
matter,  the  names  of  species,  if  derived  from  names 
of  men  or  women,  or  from  generic  names;  but  in 
geological  and  medical  matter  the  names  of  species 
are  never  capitalized: 

Vertebrata,  Reptilia,  Cruciferae,  Salix;  Felis  leo,  Cocos 
nucijera,  Rosa  Carolina,  Parkinsonia  Torreyana,  Styrax  cali- 
fomica,  Lythnim  hyssopijolia,  Phyleuma  Halleri,  Carex 
Halleriana  (but  [geological]:  Pterygomatopus  schmidti, 
Conodectus  javosus).     (See  71  •) 

47.  The  names  and  epithets  of  peoples,  races,  and  tribes: 
Kafir,  Negro,  Hottentot,  IVIakassar,  Buginese,  Celestials. 

48.  In  astronomical  work,  the  names  of  the  bodies  of 
our  solar  system  (except  "sun,"  "earth,"  "moon," 
"stars"): 

the  Milky  Way,  the  Great  Bear,  Saturn. 

49.  Divisions,  departments,  officers,  and  courses  of 
study  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  in  all  official 
work  dealing  with  its  administration  or  curricula: 

(the  University),  the  School  of  Education  (the  School),  the 
University  Extension  Division  (but:  the  division),  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  (but:  the  department);  the  Board  of 
Trustees  (the  Trustees,  the  Board),  the  Senate,  the  Council, 


20  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

the  Faculty  of  the  College  of  Commerce  and  Administration 
(but:  the  faculty);  the  President,  the  Registrar,  Professor  of 
Physics,  Assistant  in  Chemistry,  Fellow,  Scholar;  the  Van 
Husen  Scholarship  (but:  the  scholarship) ;  courses  in  Political 
Economy,  Autumn  Quarter  (but:  a  quarter).  First  Term  (but: 
two  terms;  major,  minor);  [Hall  (referring  to  the  University 
dormitories)]. 

Use  Capitals  and  Small  Capitals  for — 
50.  The  names  of  town  and  state  in  the  date  Hne,  and 
the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  beginning,  of  letters, 
and  the  signature  and  residence  at  the  end  of  letters 
or  articles,  etc.: 

Chicago,  III.,  January  i,  19 10 
(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  preferably  in 
smaller  type  than  the  body  of  the  letter.) 

My  dear  Mr.  Smith: 

(Set  flush,  followed  by  a  colon,  in  the  same  type  as  the  body 
of  the  letter,  and  in  a  separate  line,  unless  preceded  by 
another  line  giving  the  name  and  address,  in  which  case  it 
should  be  run  in  with  the  text  of  the  letter,  indented  as  a 
paragraph  [see  64].) 

Charles  W.  Scott 
(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  in  the  same 
type  as  the  body  of  the  letter  or  article.) 

Harvard  University 
Cambridge,  Mass. 
June  7,  1909 
(Set  to  the  left,  with  two  ems'  indention,  in  smaller  type.) 
(Each  line  of  the  address  should  be  in  caps  and  small  caps, 
and  should  be  centered  on   the  one  preceding.     The  date 
should  be  in  caps  and  lower  case,  likewise  centered  on  those 
above.) 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  21 


51.  In  resolutions,  the  word  "Whereas"  (see  39);  in 
notes  (not  footnotes),  the  word  "Note,"  which 
should  be  followed  by  a  period  and  a  dash;  in  con- 
stitutions, by-laws,  etc.,  the  word  "Section"  intro- 
ducing paragraphs  and  followed  by  a  number: 

Note.— It  should  be  noticed  that  .... 

Section  i.     This  association  shall  be  styled  .... 

The  usual  practice  is  to  abbreviate  the  word 
"section"  each  time  it  is  used  in  such  a  connection, 
except  the  first: 

Section  i.     The  name  of  the  association,  etc. 
Sec.  2.     The  object  of  the  association,  etc. 

Set  in  Small  Capitals — 

52.  a.m.  and  p.m.  {ante  and  post  meridiem),  and  B.C. 
and  a.d.  ("before  Christ"  and  anno  Domini);  these 
are  to  be  set  without  a  space  between  (see  22, 
103,  106,  219): 

11:30  A.M.;    53  B.C.,   1906  A.D. 

Use  Small  (i.e.,  "lower-case")  Initl\l  Letter  for— 

53.  Words  of  common  usage,  originally  proper  names, 
and  their  derivatives,  in  whose  present,  generalized 
acceptation  the  origin  has  become  obscured,  and 
generally  all  verbs  derived  from  proper  names 
(see  i) : 

Utopia,  bohemian,  philistinc,  titanic,  platonic,  quixotic, 
bonanza,  china,  morocco,  guinea-pig,  boycott,  roman  (type), 
italicize,  christianize,  anglicize,  macadamize. 


22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

54.  In  literary  references  such  minor  subdivisions  and 

their  abbreviations  as — 

chapter,  section,  page,  article,  verse,  line,  note;    chap.,  sec, 
p.,  art.,  vs.,  1.,  n.     (See  37,  no,  and  236.) 

55.  Units  of  measurement  as — 

h.  =  hour,    min.  =  minute,    sec.=second;     lb.  =  pound,    oz.= 
ounce;  yd.  =  yard;   ft.  =  foot;  etc. 

56.  In  itaHc  side-heads,  all  but  the  first  word  and  proper 
names.     (See  172  and  280.) 

57.  The  first  word  of  a  quotation  which,  through  a  con- 
junction or  otherwise,  is  immediately  connected  with 
what  precedes,  even  if  such  word  in  the  original 
begins  a  sentence. 

For  illustration  and  exception  see  35  and  131. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   ITALICS  23 


THE  USE  OF  ITALICS 
Italicize — 

58.  Words  or  phrases  to  which  it  is  desired  to  lend 
emphasis,  importance,  etc.: 

"This  was,  however,  not  the  case";  "It  is  sufficiently  plain 
that  the  sciences  0}  life,  at  least,  are  studies  of  processes." 

59.  Words  and  phrases  from  foreign  languages,  inserted 
into  the  English  text,  and  not  incorporated  into  the 
English  language;  and  also  (as  a  rule)  single  sen- 
tences or  brief  passages  not  of  sufi&cient  length  to 
call  for  reduced  type  (see  85) : 

"the  Darwinian  Weltanschauung" ;  "Napoleon's  coup  d'etat"; 
"the  debater  par  excellence  of  the  Senate";  "De  gustibus  non 
est  disputandum,  or,  as  the  French  have  it,  Chacun  d  son 
gout." 

But  do  not  italicize  foreign  titles  preceding  names, 
or  names  of  foreign  institutions  or  places  the  meaning 
or  position  of  which  in  English  would  have  required 
roman  type,  and  which  either  are  without  English 
equivalents  or  are  by  preference  used  in  lieu  of  these: 

Pere  Lagrange,  Freiherr  von  Schwenau;  the  German 
Reichstag,  the  Champs  Elysees,  the  Museo  delle  Terme; 

nor  words  of  everyday  occurrence  which  have  become 
sufficiently  anglicized,  even  though  still  retaining  the 
accents  of  the  original  language: 


24 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


a  posteriori 

entree 

per  capita 

a  priori 

ex  cathedra 

per  cent 

a  propos 

ex  officio 

per  contra 

aide  de  camp 

expose 

personnel 

attache 

fajade 

postmortem 

bas-relief 

facsimile 

(n.  and  adj.) 

beau  ideal 

fete 

prima  facie 

bona  fide 

habeas  corpus 

pro  and  con(tra) 

bric-a-brac 

habitue 

protege 

cafe 

innuendo 

pro  tem(pore) 

charge  d'affaires 

levee 

questionnaire 

chiaroscuro 

litterateur 

queue 

clientele 

litterati 

regime 

confrere 

massage 

rendezvous 

.  connoisseur 

matinee 

resume 

criterion  (-a) 

melee 

reveille 

cul-de-sac 

menu 

role 

data 

motif 

savant 

debris 

naive 

sobriquet 

debut 

nee 

soiree 

decollete 

net 

umlaut 

denouement 

neve 

tete-a-tete 

depot  (= depository) 

niche 

versus  (v.) 

doctrinaire 

nil 

via 

dramatis  personae 

nom  de  plume 

vice  versa 

eclat 

papier  mache 

vis-a-vis 

elite 

per  annum 

viva  voce 

ennui 

60.  Titles  of  publications — books  (including  plays,  essays, 
cycles  of  poems,  and  single  poems  of  considerable 
length,  usually  printed  separately,  and  not  from  the 
context  understood  to  form  parts  of  a  larger  vol- 
ume), pamphlets,  treatises,  tracts,  documents,  and 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   ITALICS  25 


periodicals  (including  regularly  appearing  proceed- 
ings and  transactions;  and  also  the  name  of  a 
journal  appearing  in  the  journal  itself)  (see  41) : 

Spencer,  Principles  0}  Sociology;  A  Midsummer  Night's 
Dream;  Carlyle,  Essay  on  Burns;  Idylls  0}  the  King;  Paradise 
Lost;  the  Independent,  the  Modern  Language  Review,  the 
Chicago  Tribune,  Report  oj  the  United  States  Commissioner  of 
Education,  Transactions  of  the  Illinois  Society  jor  Child-Study. 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  uses  italics  for  such  titles  in  the 
text  only;  in  footnotes,  roman.  Its  own  name  it  prints  in  caps 
and  small  caps — Box.  Gazette. 

Books  of  the  Bible,  both  canonical  and  apocryphal, 
and  titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  should  be  set  in 
roman  type.     (See  31  and  44.) 

61.  The   following  words,   phrases,   and  abbreviations 

used  in  literary  and  legal  references: 

ibid.,  idem,  loc.  cit.,  op.  cit.,  ad  lac,  s.v.,  supra,  infra,  passim, 
vide,  circa  (ca.). 

But  do  not  italicize — 

cf.,  i.e.,  e.g.,  V.  (versus),  viz.,  etc. 

62.  The  words  See  and  See  also,  when  used  in  an  index 
or  similar  compilation,  for  the  purpose  of  a  cross- 
reference,  where  the  differentiation  of  those  words 
from  the  context  is  desirable. 

63.  The  names  of  plaintiff  and  defendant  in  the  citation 
of  legal  causes;  also  the  titles  of  proceedings  con- 
taining such  prefixes  as  in  re,  ex  parte,  and  "  in  the 
matter  of": 


26  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Conolly  V.  Union  Sewer  Pipe  Co.;  In  re  Smith;  Ex  parte 
Brown;  In  the  matter  oj  the  petition  of  Henry  Robinson  for  a 
writ  of  habeas  corpus. 

64.  Address  lines  in  speeches,  reports,  etc.,  and  primary 
address  lines  in  letters  (set  flush,  in  a  separate  line, 
with  nouns  capitalized  [see  50]) : 

Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 
Mr.  John  Smith,  J2i  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago,  III. 
Dear  Sir:  I  take  pleasure  in  announcing  .... 

65.  In  signatures,  the  position  or  title  added  after  the 
name.  If  this  consists  of  only  one  word,  it  is  run  into 
the  same  line  with  the  name;  if  of  more  than  one, 
but  no  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  first  letter 
under  the  name  line,  and  indent  one  em  on  the 
right;  if  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  name  over 
the  second  line  and  set  this  flush.  These  rules  are, 
however,  subject  to  the  exigencies  of  special  cases: 

Arthur  P.  Maguire,  Secretary 

Yours  very  truly, 

Carter  H.  Harrison 

Mayor  of  Chicago 

Charles  M.  Gayley 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature 

66.  a),  b),  c),  etc.,  used  to  indicate  subdivisions  (single 
parenthesis  if  beginning  a  paragraph,  double  paren- 
theses if  "run  in");  and  a,  b,  c,  etc.,  affixed  to  the 
number  of  verse,  page,  etc.,  to  denote  fractional  part: 

Luke  4:3ra. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   ITALICS  27 


67.  Letters  used  to  designate  unknown  quantities,  lines, 
etc.,  in  algebraic,  geometrical,  and  similar  matter: 
ac+bc=c(a+b);   the  lines  aJ  and  ^£);  the  Hth  power. 

68.  As  a  rule,  letters  in  legends  or  in  the  text  referring 
to  corresponding  letters  in  accompanying  illustra- 
tions: 

"At  the  point  A  above  (see  diagram)." 

69.  References  to  particular  letters: 
the  letter  u,  a  small  v. 

70.  5.  and  (/.  (  =  shillings  and  pence)  following  numerals: 
35.  6d. 

71.  In  zoological,  botanical,  and  geological  matter,  scien- 
tific (Latin)  names  of  genera  and  species  when  used 
together;  and  in  astronomical  matter,  names  of  stars 
or  constellations: 

Fclis  leo,  Rosa  Carolina,  Conodectes  favosus,  Saturn,  Cas- 
siopeia.    (See  46,  48.) 

In  medical  matter,  however,  the  general  practice 
is  to  print  such  names,  in  roman,  avoiding  italics 
altogether. 

72.  In  resolutions,  the  word  ^' Resolved.'^     (See  39.) 

73.  After  headlines  or  titles,  as  a  rule,  the  word  "Con- 
tinued^'; and  "  To  be  continued^^  at  the  end  of  articles 
(see  179): 

THE  SCOPE  OF  SOClOl.OG\— Continued 
[To  he  continued] 


28  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


QUOTATIONS 

Put  between  Quotation  Marks  (and  in  roman  type — 
i.e.,  "  roman-quote  ") — 

74.  Citations,  run  into  the  text,  of  a  passage  from  an 
author  in  his  own  words.     (See  85.) 

75.  Quotations  from  different  authors,  or  from  different 
works  by  the  same  author,  following  each  other, 
uninterrupted  by  any  intervening  original  matter,  or 
by  any  reference  to  their  respective  sources  (other 
than  a  reference  figure  for  a  footnote) ,  even  though 
such  quotations  are  reduced.     (See  85-87.) 

76.  A  word  or  phrase  accompanied  by  its  definition: 
"Drop-folio"  means  a  page-number  at  the  foot  of  the  page. 

77.  An  unusual,  technical,  ironical,  etc.,  word  or  phrase 
in  the  text,  whether  or  not  accompanied  by  a  word, 
like  "so-called,"  directing  attention  to  it: 

Her  "five  o'clocks"  were  famous  in  the  neighborhood;  She 
was  wearing  a  gown  of  "lobster-colored"  silk;  He  was  elected 
"master  of  the  rolls";  We  then  repaired  to  what  he  called 
his  "quarter  deck";  A  "lead"  is  then  inserted  between  the 
lines;  This  so-called  "man  of  affairs." 

78.  In  translations,  the  English  equivalent  of  a  word, 
phrase,  or  passage  from  a  foreign  language : 

Weltanschauung,  "world-view"  or  "fundamental  aspect  of 
life";  Mommsen  Romische  Geschichte  (^'History  oi  Rome"). 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   QUOTATIONS  29 

79.  The  particular  word  or  words  to  which  attention  is 
directed : 

the  term  "lynch  law";  the  phrase  "liberty  of  conscience"; 
the  concepts  "good"  and  "bad";   the  name  "Chicago." 

80.  Serial  titles: 

"English  Men  of  Letters"  series;  "International  Critical 
Commentary." 

81.  Titles  of  shorter  poems  (see  60): 
Shelley's  "To  a  Skylark." 

82.  Cited  titles  of  subdivisions  (e.g.,  parts,  books,  chap- 
ters, etc.)  of  publications;  titles  of  papers,  lectures, 
sermons,  articles,  toasts,  mottoes,  etc.: 

The  Beginnings  of  the  Science  of  Political  Economy,  Vol.  I, 
"The  British  School,"  chap,  ii,  "John  Stuart  Mill";  the 
articles  "Cross,"  "Crucifixion,"  and  "Crusade"  in  Hast- 
ings' Dictionary  of  the  Bible;  The  subject  of  the  lecture  was 
"Japan — Its  Past,  Present,  and  Future";  the  next  toast  on 
the  program  was  "Our  German  Visitor";  The  king's 
motto  is  "For  God  and  My  Country." 

Note. — The  Botanical   Gazette,   in   footnotes,    does   not    use 
quotation  marks  for  such  titles. 

References  to  the  Preface,  Introduction,  Table  of 

Contents,  Index,  etc.,  of  a  specific  work,  should  be 

set  with  capitals,  without  quotation  marks: 

Preface,  p.  iii;  "The  Introduction  contains  ....";  "The 
Appendix  occupies  a  hundred  pages";  but:  "The  book  has 
a  very  complete  index." 

83.  Names  of  ships: 

the  U.S.  SS.  "Oregon." 


30  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

84.  Titles  of  works  of  art: 
Murillo's  "The  Holy  Family." 

Set  in  Smaller  Type — 

85.  Ordinarily,  all  prose  extracts  which  will  make  five 
or  more  lines  in  the  smaller  type,  and  all  poetry 
citations  of  two  lines  or  more.  An  isolated  prose 
quotation,  even  though  its  length  would  bring  it 
under  this  rule,  may  properly  be  run  into  the  text,  if 
it  bears  an  organic  relation  to  the  argument  pre- 
sented. On  the  other  hand,  a  quotation  of  one  or 
two  lines  which  is  closely  preceded  or  followed  by 
longer  extracts,  set  in  smaller  type,  may  likewise  be 
reduced,  as  a  matter  of  uniform  appearance. 

86.  As  a  rule,  reduce  from  11 -pt.  and  lo-pt.  to  9-pt., 
from  9-pt.  to  8-pt.,  from  8-pt.  to  6-pt.     (See  252.) 

87.  Reduced  citations  should  not  have  quotation  marks, 
except  in  such  cases  as  noted  in  75 ;  nor  should 
quotation  marks,  as  a  rule,  be  used  in  connection 
with   italics. 

General  Rules — 

88.  Quotation  marks  should  always  include  ellipses,  and 

the  phrase  "etc."  when  it  otherwise  would  not  be 

clear  that  it  stands  for  an  omitted  part  of  the  matter 

quoted,   perfect  clearness  in  each   individual  case 

being  the  best  criterion: 

"Art.  II,  sec.  2,  of  the  Constitution  provides  that  'each  state 
shall  appoint  ....  a  number  of  electors  equal  to  the  whole 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   QUOTATIONS  31 

number  of  senators  and  representatives  .  .  .  .'";  "He  also 
wrote  a  series  of  'Helps  to  Discovery,  etc.'" — "etc."  here 
indicating,  not  that  he  wrote  other  works  which  are  unnamed, 
but  that  the  title  of  the  one  named  is  not  given  in  full;  but, 
on  the  other  hand:  "Preaching  from  the  text,  'For  God  so 
loved  the  world,'  etc.  .  .  ."—"etc."  here  being  placed 
outside  of  the  quotation  marks  in  order  to  show  that  it  does 
not  stand  for  other,  unnamed,  objects  of  God's  love. 

89.  Quoted  prose  matter  (i.e.,  matter  set  with  quotation 
marks;  see  above)  which  is  broken  up  into  para- 
graphs should  have  the  quotation  marks  repeated 
at  the  beginning  of  each  paragraph. 

90.  Where  alignment  is  desired,   the  quotation  marks 

should  be  "cleared" — i.e.,  should   project  beyond 

the  line  of  alignment: 

"Keep  away  from  dirtiness — keep  away  from  mess. 
Don't  get  into  doin'  things  rather-more-or-less ! " 

91.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  primary  quota- 
tions; for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation,  single; 
going  back  to  double  for  a  third,  to  single  for  a 
fourth,  and  so  on: 

"The  orator  then  proceeded:  'The  dictionary  tells  us  that 
"the  words,  'freedom'  and  'liberty,'  though  often  inter- 
changed, are  distinct  in  some  of  their  applications."  '  " 


32  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SPELLING 
Spell  out — 

92.  All  civil  and  military  titles,  and  forms  of  address, 
preceding  the  name,  except  Mr.,  Messrs.,  Mrs. 
(French:  M.,  MM.,  M"^  M"'),  Dr.,  Rev.,  Hon. 
{do  not,  except  in  quotations,  set  the  Rev.,  the  Hon.) ; 
Esq.,  following  the  name,  should  likewise  always  be 
abbreviated. 

93.  Christian  names,  as  George,  Charles,  John  (not: 
Geo.,  Chas.,  Jno.),  except  where  the  abbreviated 
form  is  used  in  quoted  matter  or  in  original  signa- 
tures; and  "von"  as  part  of  a  person's  name,  (See 
239.) 

94.  In  ordinary  reading-matter,  all  numbers  of  less  than 
three  digits,  unless  of  a  statistical  or  technical  charac- 
ter, or  unless  occurring  in  groups  of  six  or  more  fol- 
lowing each  other  in  close  succession: 

"There  are  thirty-eight  cities  in  the  United  States  with  a 
population  of  100,000  or  over";  "a  fifty-yard  dash";  "two 
pounds  of  sugar";  "Four  horses,  sixteen  cows,  seventy-six 
sheep,  and  a  billy  goat  constituted  the  live  stock  of  the  farm"; 
"He  spent  a  total  of  two  years,  three  months,  and  seventeen 
days  in  jail."  But:  "He  spent  128  days  in  the  hospital"; 
"a  board  20  feet  2  inches  long  by  ij  feet  wide  and  i|  inches 
thick";  "the  ratio  of  16  to  i";  "In  some  quarters  of  Paris, 
inhabited  by  wealthy  families,  the  death-rate  is  i  to  every  65 
persons;  in  others,  inhabited  by  the  poor,  it  is  i  to  15";  "His 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING  33 

purchase  consisted  of  2  pounds  of  sugar,  20  pounds  of  flour, 
I  pound  of  coiTee,  i  pound  of  tea,  3  pounds  of  meat,  and 
i^  pounds  of  fish,  besides  2  pecks  of  potatoes  and  a  pint  of 
vinegar." 

Treat  all  numbers  in  connected  groups  alike,  as  far 
as  possible;  do  not  use  figures  for  some  and  spell  out 
others;  if  the  largest  contains  three  or  more  digits, 
use  figures  for  all  (see  96) ;  per  cent  should  always 
take  figures : 

"The  force  employed  during  the  three  months  was  87,  93, 
and  106,  respectively";    i-io  per  cent. 

95.  Round  numbers  (i.e.,  approximate  figures  in  even 
units,  the  unit  being  100  in  numbers  of  less  than 
1,000,  and  1,000  in  numbers  of  more) : 

"The  attendance  was  estimated  at  five  hundred"  (but:  "at 
550");  "a  thesis  of  about  three  thousand  words"  (but:  "of 
about  2,700");  "The  population  of  Chicago  is  approximately 
two  millions"  (but:  "1,900,000").  Cases  like  1,500,  if  for 
some  special  reason  spelled  out,  should  be  written  "fifteen 
hundred,"  not  "one  thousand  five  hundred  " 

96.  All  numbers,  no  matter  how^  high,  commencing  a 
sentence  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 

"Five  hundred  and  ninety-three  men,  417  women,  and  126 
children  under  eighteen,  besides  63  of  the  crew,  went  down 
with  the  ship." 

When  this  is  impracticable,  reconstruct  the  sentence; 

e.g.: 

"The  total  number  of  those  who  went  down  with  the  shij) 

was  593  men,"  etc. 


34  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


97.  Sums  of  money,  when  occurring  in  isolated  cases  in 
ordinary  reading-matter : 

"The  admission  was  two  dollars." 

When  several  such  numbers  occur  close  together,  and 
in  all  matter  of  a  statistical  character,  use  figures: 
"Admission:   men,  $2;  women,  $1;   children,  25  cents." 

98.  Time  of  day,  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 

at  foUr;  at  half-past  two  in  the  afternoon;  at  seven  o'clock. 

Statistically,  in  enumerations,  and  always  in  connec- 
tion with  A.M.  and  p.m.,  use  figures: 
at  4: 15  P.M.  (omit  "o'clock"  in  such  connections). 

99.  Ages: 

eighty  years  and  four  months  old;  children  between  six  and 
fourteen. 

100.  Numbers  of  centuries,   of  Egyptian  dynasties,   of 

sessions  of  Congress,  of  military  bodies,  of  political 

divisions,  of  thoroughfares,  and  in  all  similar  cases, 

unless  brevity  is  an  important  consideration   (see 

7,  8,  and  13) : 

nineteenth  century;  Fifth  Dynasty;  Fifty-fourth  Congress, 
Second  Session;  Fifteenth  Infantry  I.N.G.;  Sixth  Con- 
gressional District,  Second  Ward;   Fifth  Avenue. 

1 01.  References  to  particular  decades: 
in  the  nineties. 

102.  Names  of  months,  except  in  statistical  matter  or  in 
long  enumerations: 

from  January  i  to  April  15  (omit,  after  dates,  st,  d,  and  ih). 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING        35 

. ■ • 

103.  "United  States,"  except  in  quotations  and  such  con- 
nections as:  General  Schofield,  U.S.A.;  U.S.  SS. 
"  Oregon";  in  footnotes  and  similar  references:  U.S. 
Geological  Survey.     (See  22,  52,  106.) 

104.  "Railroad  (-way),"  and  "Fort"  and  "Mount"  in 

geographical  appellations : 

Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad  (not:  R.R.  or  Ry.j; 
Fort  Wayne,  Mount  Elias. 

105.  In  most  cases,  all  names  of  publications.  This  rule, 
like  many  another,  is  open  to  modification  in  particu- 
lar instances,  for  which  no  directions  can  here  be 
given.  Expediency,  nature  of  context,  authoritative 
usage,  and  author's  preference  are  some  of  the  points 
to  be  considered.  Generally,  if  in  doubt,  spell  out; 
good  taste  will  condone  offenses  in  this  direction 
more  readily  than  in  the  opposite. 

Abbreviate — 

106.  Names  of  states,  territories,  and  possessions  of  the 
United  States  following  those  of  towns,  with  a  few 
exceptions,  as  follows,  without  space  between  the 
letters  of  abbreviations  (see  22,  52, 103) : 


Ala. 

Fla. 

Ky. 

Alaska 

Ga. 

La. 

Ariz. 

H.I.=Hawaiian 

Me. 

Ark. 

Islands 

Mass. 

Cal. 

Id. 

Md. 

Colo. 

111. 

Mich. 

Conn. 

Ind. 

Minn 

D.C. 

la. 

Miss. 

Del. 

Kan. 

Mo. 

36  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Mont. 

Okla. 

Tcnn. 

N.C. 

Ore. 

Tex. 

N.D. 

Pa. 

Utah 

Neb. 

P.I.  =  Philippine 

Vt. 

Nev. 

Islands 

Va 

N.H. 

P.R.==Porto  Rico 

Wash. 

N.J. 

R.I. 

Wis. 

N.M. 

Samoa 

W.Va. 

N.Y. 

S.C. 

Wyo. 

O. 

S.D. 

107.  In  technical  matter  (footnote  references,  bibliogra- 
phies, etc.),  "Company"  and  "Brothers,"  and  the 
word  "and"  (&  =" short  and"  or  " ampersand ") ,  in 
names  of  commercial  firms: 

The  Macmillan  Co.,  IMacmillan  &  Co.,  Harper  Bros.; 
Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad. 

In  text  matter,  not  of  a  technical  character,  "  Com- 
pany" and  "Brothers"  may,  however,  be  spelled 
out: 

"Harper  Brothers  have  recently  published  ....";  "The 
Century  Company  announces  ....";  "The  extraordinary 
story  of  the  South  Sea  Company." 

108.  "Saint"  before  a  name: 

St.  Louis,  St.  Peter's  Church,  SS.  Peter  and  Paul. 

"  St."  should,  however,  preferably  be  omitted  in  con- 
nection with  the  names  of  apostles,  evangelists,  and 
church  fathers: 

Luke,  Paul,  Augustine;  not:  St.  Luke,  St.  Paul,  St.  Augus- 
tine. 

109.  In  references  to  Scripture  passages,  the  books  of 
the  Bible  and  of  the  Apocrypha,  as  follows: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING                    37 

OLD   TESTAMENT 

Gen. 

Esther 

Hos. 

Exod. 

Job 

Joel 

Lev. 

Ps.  (Pss.) 

Amos 

Num. 

Prov. 

Obad. 

Deut. 

Eccles. 

Jonah 

Josh. 

Song  of  Sol.  (or 

Mic. 

Judg. 

Cant.) 

Nah. 

Ruth 

Isa. 

Hab. 

I  and  II  Sam. 

Jer. 

Zeph. 

I  and  II  Kings 

Lam. 

Hag. 

I  and  II  Chron. 

Ezek. 

Zech. 

Ezra 

Dan. 

Mai. 

Neh. 

NEW   TESTAMENT 

Matt. 

Gal. 

Philem. 

Mark 

Eph. 

Heb. 

Luke 

Phil. 

Jas. 

John 

Col. 

I  and  II  Pet. 

Acts 

I  and  II  Thess. 

I,  II,  and  III  John 

Rom. 

I  and  II  Tim. 

Jude 

I  and  II  Cor. 

Titus 

Rev. 

APOCRYPHA 

I  and  II  Esd. 

Wisd.  of  Sol. 

Sus. 

Tob.= 

=Tobit 

Ecclus. 

Bel  and  Dragon 

Jud.= 

Judith 

Bar. 

Pr.  of  Man. 

Restc 

if  Esther 

Song  of  Three 

I,  II,  III,  and  IV 

Children 

Mace. 

1 10.  In  literary  references,  in  footnotes  and  matter  of  a 
bibliographical  character, '  "volume,"  "number," 
"chapter,"  "article,"  "section,"  "page,"  "column," 
"verse,"  "line,"  "note,"  "figure,"  followed  by  their 
number  (see  37  and  236);  and  the  word  "follow- 
ing" after  the  number  to  denote  continuance: 

Vol.  I  (plural.  Vols.),  No.  i  (Nos.),  chap,  ii  (chaps.),  art.  iii 
(arts.),  sec.  4  (sees.),  p.  5  (pp.),  col.  6  (cols.),  vs.  7  (vss.), 


38  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

1.8  (11.),  n.  9  (nn.);  pp.  5-7  (=pages  5  to  7  inclusive),  pp.  5  f. 
(  =  page  5  and  the  following  page),  pp.  5  ff.  (  =  pages  5  and  the 
following  pages) ;  Fig.  7. 

111.  The  common  designations  of  weights  and  measures 
in  the  metric  system,  as  well  as  the  symbols  of  meas- 
urement in  common  use,  when  following  a  numeral: 

I  m.,  2  dm.,  3  cm.,  4  mm.;  cm.  (  =  cubic  meter),  c.d.,  c.c, 
c.mm.;  gm.  (=gram);  gr.  (  =  grain);  h.  (=hour),  min. 
(=minute),  sec.  (=second);  lb.  (=pound),  oz.  (=ounce); 
yd.,  ft.,  in.,  etc. 

General  Rules — 

112.  In  extracts  from  modern  authors  whose  spelling  and 
punctuation  differ  but  slightly  from  ours,  and  where 
such  variations  do  not  affect  the  meaning,  use  office 
style.  In  citations  from  Old  English  works,  and  in 
such  cases  where  it  appears  to  be  essential  to  the 
writer's  plan  or  the  requirements  of  the  context  to 
give  a  faithful  rendering,  follow  the  original  copy. 
Titles  should  always  be  accurately  quoted. 

113.  Form  the  possessive  of  proper  names  ending  in  5  or 
another  sibilant,  if  monosyllabic,  by  adding  an 
apostrophe  and  s;  .if  of  more  than  one  syllabFe,  by 
adding  an  apostrophe  alone: 

King  James's  Version,  Bums's  poems,  Marx's  theories; 
Moses'  law,  Jesus'  birth,  Demosthenes'  orations,  Beriioz' 
compositions;   for  convenience'  sake. 

114.  Before  sounded  h,  long  «,  and  the  word  "one"  use 
"a"  as  the  form  of  the  indefinite  article: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING  39 

a  hotel,  a  harmonic,  a  historical,  a  unionja^euphonious  word], 
sUch  a  one. 

115.  Do  not  use  ligature  cb  and  ce,  but  separate  the  letters, 
in  quotations  from  Latin,  and  in  anglicized  deriva- 
tives from  Latin,  or  from  Greek  through  Latin, 
where  e  has  not  been  substituted  for  the  diphthong: 

Aurea  prima  sata  est  aetasque,  vindice  nullo, 
sponte  sua,  sine  lege,  fidem  rectumque  colebat; 
poena  metusque  aberant  .... 
the  Aeneid,  Oedipus  Tyrannus,  Caesar,  aesthetic,  subpoena. 

In  quotations  from  Old  English,  and  from  French 
and  other  modern  languages  it  is  incorrect  to  separate 
the  letters: 
iElfred,  AS  ^W(E/e=" wheat";  (Euvres  de  Balzac,  chej-d'ceuvre. 

116.  Differentiate  "farther"  and  "further"  by  using  the 
former  in  the  sense  of  "more  remote,"  "at  a  greater 
distance";  the  latter  in  the  sense  of  "moreover," 
"in  addition": 

the  farther  end;  he  went  still  farther;  further,  he  suggested;  a 
further  reason. 

117.  In  forms  of  address  (vocative)  use  the  "O"  without 
a  comma  following;  for  an  exclamation  use  "Oh," 
followed  by  a  comma : 

"O  thou  most  mighty  ruler!"     "Oh,  why  did  not  Cerberus 
drag  me  back  to  hell?" 

118.  The  following  participles,  although  ending  with  a  syl- 
lable beginning  with  a  vowel,  retain  the  final  e  in  the 
primary  word: 


40 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


agreeing 

dyeing 

eyeing 


hieing 
hoeing 
shoeing 


singemg 
tingeing 
vieing 


The  following  participles  omit  the  e  before  the  ter- 
minal: 

acknowledging  grudging  trudging 

awing  gluing  owing 

bluing  icing  truing 

encouraging  judging 


119.  Spell: 


abridgment 

blessed 

diarrhea 

fulfil 

accouter 

bowlder 

disheveled 

fulness 

acknowledgmentburned 

disk 

Galilean 

adz 

caesura 

dispatch 

gaiety 

aegis 

cahber 

disdl 

gipsy 

Aeolian 

canceled 

downward 

glamor 

aesthetic 

candor 

draft 

glycerin 

afterward 

cannoneer 

drought 

goodbye 

Algonkian 

canyon 

dueler 

graveled 

almanac 

carcass 

dulness 

gray 

aluminum 

caroled 

dwelt 

gruesome 

ambassador 

castor  (roller) 

embitter 

guarantee   (v.) 

amid 

caN-iler 

emir 

guaranty  (n.) 

among 

center 

employee 

harbor 

anemia  , 

check 

encyclopedic 

hematoxyHn 

appareled 

chiseled 

endeavor 

hemorrhage 

arbor 

chlorid 

engulf 

Hindu 

archaeology 

chock-full 

enrol 

honor 

ardor 

clamor 

ensnare 

imbed 

armor 

clinch 

envelope  (n.) 

impaneled 

ascendency 

clue 

enwrapped 

imperiled 

ascendent 

color 

equaled 

incase 

Athenaeum 

controller 

Eskimo 

inclose 

ax 

cotillion 

exhibitor 

incrust 

aye 

councilor 

fantasy 

incumbrance 

bark  (vessel) 

counselor 

favor 

indorse 

barreled 

cozy 

fetish 

infold 

bazaar 

cue 

fiber 

ingraft 

Beduin 

defense 

flavor 

instal 

behavior 

demarkation 

fluorid 

instil 

biased 

demeanor 

focused 

insure 

'  In  official  publications  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  "comptroller." 


I 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING 


41 


intrench 

moneyed 

reconnoiter 

syrup 

intrust 

movable 

reinforce 

taboo 

jeweled 

mustache 

rencounter 

talc 

Judea 

neighbor 

reverie 

theater 

judgment 

odor 

rigor 

thraldom 

kidnaper 

oxid 

rivaled 

thrash 

Koran 

offense 

riveted 

tormentor 

labeled 

paean 

ruljle 

toward 

labor 

paleography 

rumor 

trammeled 

lacquer 

paleonto  ogy 

saber 

tranquilize 

leukocyte 

paneled 

salable 

tranquillity 

leveled 

parceled 

Savior 

traveler 

libeled 

parole 

savor 

trousers 

liter 

parquet 

scepter 

tumor 

lodgment 

partisan 

sepulcher 

upward 

maneuver 

penciled 

sergeant 

valor 

marshaled 

Phoenix 

skepticism 

vapor 

marvelous 

plow 

skilful 

vendor 

meager 

practice  (n.   & 

smolder 

vigor 

mediaeval 

V.) 

somber 

whiskey 

meter 

pretense 

specter 

wilful 

miter 

primeval 

staunch 

woeful 

modeled 

program 

subpoena 

woolen 

Mohammedan 

pigmy 

subtle 

worshiper 

mold 

quarreled 

succor 

Yahweh 

molt 

raveled 

sumac 

Note. — Make   one    word    of  "anyone,"  "someone,"    "today," 
"tomorrow,"  "tonight,"  "cannot."     (See  204.) 

120.  Differentiate    between    the    terminations   -ise    and 
-ize  as  follows: 


SPELL    WITH  -Z.se 


advertise 

comprise 

enterprise 

merchandise 

advise 

compromise 

excise 

premise 

affranchise 

demise 

exercise 

reprise 

appraise 

despise 

exorcise 

revise 

ajjprise  (lo 

devise 

franchise    ^ 

rise 

inform) 

disfranchise 

improvise 

supervise 

arise 

disguise 

incise 

surmise 

chastise 

emprise 

manuprise 

surprise 

circumcise 

enfranchise 

42 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SPELL   WITH   -ize   i-yze) 


aggrandize 
agonize 
analyze 
anatomize 
anglicize 
apologize 
apostrophize 
apprize  (to 
appraise) 
authorize 
baptize 
brutahze 
canonize 
catechize 
cathoKcize 
cauterize 
centralize 
characterize 
christianize 
civilize 
classicize 
colonize 
criticize 
crystallize 
demoralize 
deputize 
dogmatize 


economize 

emphasize 

energize 

epitomize 

equahze 

eulogize 

evangelize 

extemporize 

familiarize 

fertihze 

fossilize 

fraternize 

galvanize 

generalize 

gormandize 

harmonize 

hellenize 

immortalize 

italicize 

jeopardize 

legalize 

liberalize 

localize 

magnetize 

manumize 

memorialize 

mesmerize 


metamorphize 

methodize 

minimize 

modernize 

monopolize 

moralize 

nationalize 

naturalize 

neutralize 

organize 

ostracize 

oxidize 

paralyze 

particularize 

pasteurize 

patronize 

philosophize 

plagiarize 

polarize 

professionalize 

protestantize 

pulverize 

realize 

recognize 

reorganize 

revolutionize 

satirize 


scandalize 

scrutinize 

signalize 

solemnize 

soliloquize 

specialize 

spiritualize 

standardize 

stigmatize 

subsidize 

summarize 

syllogize 

symbolize 

sympathize 

tantalize 

temporize 

tranquilize 

tyrannize 

utilize 

vaporize 

visualize 

vitalize 

vocalize 

vulcanize 

vulgarize 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  43 


PUNCTUATION 

121.  All  punctuation  marks  should  be  printed  in  the  same 
style  or  font  of  type  as  the  word  or  letter  immediately 
preceding  them: 

"With  the  cry  of  Banzai!  the  regiment  stormed  the  hill"; 
Luke  4: 1 6 a;  No.  i. 

Period — 

122.  A  period  is  used  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  complete 
sentence.     (See  125.) 

123.  Put  a  period  after  all  abbreviations,  except  in  cases 
where  a  mechanical  necessity  compels  the  omission 
of  a  letter  or  letters  in  the  middle  of  a  word  for  which 
there  is  no  recognized  abbreviated  form;  such  omis- 
sion is  indicated  by  an  apostrophe.  Treat  the  metric 
symbols  as  abbreviations,  but  not  the  chemical 
symbols,  nor  the  phrase  "per  cent,"  nor  the  format 
of  books: 

Macmillan  &  Co.,  Mr.  Smith,  St.  Paul,  No.  i,  Chas.  (see 
93),  ibid.,  S.V.;  10  mm.;  but:  m'f'g  pl't  (  =  manufacturing 
plant);  O,  Fe;  2  per  cent;   4to,  8vo. 

Note. — With  respect  to  symbols  for  measures  the  following 
exceptions  should  be  noted:  Astro  physical  Journal,  12  mm  (with 
thin  space  and  no  period)  (but:  2^  3""  4^);  Botanical  Gazette, 
12™"!,  125 't  (superior,  with  hair-space).  Astrophysical  Journal 
uses  italics  for  chemical  symbols:  Fe,  CaSO^. 

But  do  not  use  period,  in  technical  matter,  after  the 
recognized   abbreviations   for  linguistic   epochs,   or 


44  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

for  titles  of  well-known  publications  of  which  the 
initials  only  are  given,  nor  after  MS  (=  manuscript) : 

IE  (  =  Indo-European),  OE  (= Old  English),  MHG  (= Middle 
High  German);  AJSL  (= American  Journal  oj  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures),  ZAW  (=Zeitschrijt  jiir  alttesta- 
mentliche  Wissenschajt),  CIL  {= Cor  pus  Inscriptionum  Lati- 
norum). 

124.  Use  no  period  after  Roman  numerals,  even  if  having 
the  value  of  ordinals: 

Vol.  IV;  Louis  XVI  was  on  the  throne. 

125.  Omit  the  period  after  running-heads  (for  explanation 
of  this  and  the  following  terms  see  279-83);  after 
centered  headlines;  after  side-heads  set  in  separate 
lines;  after  cut-in  heads;  after  box-heads  in  tables; 
and  after  superscriptions  and  legends  which  do  not 
form  a  complete  sentence  (with  subject  and  predi- 
cate) ;  after  date  lines  at  top  of  communications,  and 
after  signatures.     (See  50.) 

126.  The  period  is  placed  inside  the  quotation  marks; 
and  inside  the  parentheses  when  the  matter  inclosed 
is  an  independent  sentence  and  forms  no  part  of 
the  preceding  sentence;   otherwise  outside: 

Tennyson's  "In  Memoriam."  Put  the  period  inside  the 
quotation  marks.  (This  is  a  rule  without  exception.)  When 
the  parentheses  form  part  of  the  preceding  sentence,  put 
the  period  outside  (as,  for  instance,  here). 

Exclamation  Point — 

127.  The  exclamation  point  is  used  to  mark  an  outcry,  or 
an  emphatic  or  ironical  utterance: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  45 

"Long  live  the  king!"  "Heaven  forbid!"  "Good!"  he 
cried;  "How  funny  this  seems!"  "This  must  not  be!"  The 
subject  of  his  lecture  was  "The  Thisness  of  the  That" !  The 
speaker  went  on:  "Nobody  should  leave  his  home  tomorrow 
without  a  marked  ballot  in  their  (!)  pocket." 

128.  The  exclamation  point  is  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks  when  part  of  the  quotation;  otherwise  outside. 

See  illustrations  in  127. 

Interrogation  Point — 

129.  The  interrogation  point  is  used  to  mark  a  query,  or 
to  express  a  doubt: 

"Who  is  this  ?"  The  prisoner  gave  his  name  as  Roger  Crown- 
inshield,  the  son  of  an  English  baronet  (?). 

Indirect  questions,  however,  should  not  be  followed 
by  an  interrogation  point: 
He  asked  whether  he  was  ill. 

130.  The  interrogation  point  should  be  placed  inside  the 
quotation  marks  only  when  it  is  a  part  of  the  quota- 
tion: 

The  question:  "Who  is  who,  and  what  is  what?"  Were 
you  ever  in  "Tsintsinnati"  ? 

Colon — 

131.  The  colon  is  used  to  "mark  a  discontinuity  of 
grammatical  construction  greater  than  that  indicated 
by  the  semicolon  and  less  than  that  indicated  by  the 
period.  It  is  commonly  used  (i)  to  emphasize  a 
close  connection  in  thought  between  two  clauses  of 


46  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


which  each  forms  a  complete  sentence,  -and  which 
might  with  grammatical  propriety  be  separated  by 
a  period;  (2)  to  separate  a  clause  which  is  gram- 
matically complete  from  a  second  which  contains 
an  illustration  or  amplification  of  its  meaning;  (3) 
to  introduce  a  formal  statement,  an  extract,  a  speech 
in  a  dialogue,  etc."  {Century  Dictionary),  (unless 
this  is  preceded  by  a  conjunction,  like  "that," 
immediately  connecting  it  with  what  goes  before). 
Before  the  quotation  of  a  clause  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  use  a  comma: 

(i)  "This  argument  undeniably  contains  some  force:  Thus 
it  is  well  known  that  .  .  .  ."  "The  secretion  of  the  gland 
goes  on  uninterruptedly:  this  may  account  for  the  condition 
of  the  organ."  "The  fear  of  death  is  universal:  even  the 
lowest  animals  instinctively  shrink  from  annihilation."  (2) 
"Most  countries  have  a  national  flower:  France  the  lily, 
England  the  rose,  etc."  "Lambert  pine:  the  gigantic  sugar 
pine  of  California."  (3)  "The  rule  may  be  stated  thus: 
.  .  .  ."  "We  quote  from  the  address:  .  .  .  ."  "Charles: 
'Where  are  you  going?'  George:  'To  the  mill-pond.'" 
But:  "He  stoutly  maintained  that  'the  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery;'"  and:  "Declaring,  'The  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery,'  he  tried  to  wash  his  hands  of  the  whole  affair." 

132.  The  colon  thus  often  takes  the  place  of  an  implied 
"namely,"  "as  follows,"  "for  instance,"  or  a  similar 
phrase.  Where  such  word  or  phrase  is  used,  it 
should  be  followed  by  a  colon  if  what  follows  consists 
of  one  or  more  grammatically  complete  clauses; 
otherwise,  by  a  comma  (see  145) : 


IVIANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  47 


"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though  not 
the  largest,  in  Europe:  Great  Britain  and  France";  but: 
"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though 
"  not  the  largest,  in  Europe — viz..  Great  Britain  and  France." 
"He  made  several  absurd  statements.  For  example:  .  .  .  ."; 
but:  "There  are  several  states  in  the  Union — for  instance, 
Kansas  and  Wyoming — which  .  .  .  ." 

133.  Put  a  colon  after  the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  letter,  and  after  the  introductory  remark 
of  a  speaker  addressing  the  chairman  or  the  audience: 

My  dear  Mr.  Brown:     (See  50.) 

Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen:     (See  64.) 

134.  Put  a  colon  between  chapter  and  verse  in  Scripture 
passages,  and  between  hours  and  minutes  in  time 
indications 

Matt.  2:5-13;  4:30  P.M. 

135.  Put  a  colon  between  the  p  ace  of  publication  and 
the  publisher's  name  in  literary  references: 
Clement  0}  Alexandria  (London:   Macmillan),  II,  97. 

136.  The  colon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quotation 
marks,  unless  a  part  of  the  c^uotation: 

He  writes  under  the  head  of  "Notes  and  Comments": 
"Many  a  man  has  had  occasion  to  testify  to  the  truth  of  the 
old  adage:"  etc. 

Semicolon — 

137.  A  semicolon  is  used  to  mark  the  division  of  a  sentence 
somewhat  more  independent  than  that  marked  by 
a  comma: 


48  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


-^ 


"Are  we  giving  our  lives  to  perpetuate  the  things  that  the 
past  has  created  for  its  needs,  forgetting  to  ask  whether  these 
things  still  serve  today's  needs;  or  are  we  thinking  of  living 
men  ?"  "This  is  as  important  for  science  as  it  is  for  practice; 
indeed,  it  may  be  said  to  be  the  only  important  consideration." 
"It  is  so  in  war;  it  is  so  in  the  economic  life;  it  cannot  be 
otherwise  in  religion."  "In  Russia  the  final  decision  rests 
with  the  Czar,  advised  by  his  ministers;  in  most  constitutional 
countries,  indirectly  with  the  people  as  represented  in  parlia- 
ment; in  Switzerland  alone,  through  the  referendum,  directly 
with  the  electorate  at  large."  "This,  let  it  be  remembered, 
was  the  ground  taken  by  Mill;  for  to  him  'utiHtarianism,' 
in  spite  of  all  his  critics  may  say,  did  not  mean  the  pursuit  of 
bodily  pleasure."  ("For"  in  such  cases  should  commonly  be 
preceded  by  a  semicolon.) 

138.  In  enumerations  use  a  semicolon  between  the  differ- 
ent links,  if  these  consist  of  more  than  a  few  words 
closely  connected,  and  especially  if  individual  clauses 
contain  any  punctuation  mark  of  less  value  than  a 
period,  or  an  exclamation  or  interrogation  point 
(unless  inclosed  in  parentheses),  yet  are  intimately 
joined  one  with  the  other,  and  all  with  the  sentence 
or  clause  leading  up  to  them,  for  instance  through 
dependence  upon  a  conjunction,  like  ''that,"  pre- 
ceding them  (see  36) : 

"The  membership  of  the  international  commission  was  made 
up  as  follows:  France,  4;  Germany,  5;  Great  Britain,  i 
(owing  to  a  misunderstanding,  the  announcement  did  not 
reach  the  English  societies  in  time  to  secure  a  full  quota  from 
that  country.  Sir  Henry  Campbell,  who  had  the  matter  in 
charge,  being  absent  at  the  time,  great  difficulty  was  experi- 
enced in  arousing  sufficient  interest  to  insure  the  sending  of 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  49 

even  a  solitary  delegate);  Italy,  3;  the  United  States,  7." 
"The  defendant,  in  justification  of  his  act,  pleaded  that  (i) 
he  was  despondent  over  the  loss  of  his  wife;  (2)  he  was  out 
of  work;  (3)  he  had  had  nothing  to  eat  for  two  days;  (4)  he 
was  under  the  influence  of  liquor."  "Presidents  Hadley,  of 
Yale;  Eliot,  of  Harvard;  Butler,  of  Columbia;  and  Angell, 
of  Michigan." 

139.  In  Scripture  references  a  semicolon  is  used  to 
separate  passages  containing  chapters: 

Gen.  2:3-6,  9,  14;  3:17;   chap.  5 ;  6:15. 

140.  The  semicolon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quota- 
tion marks,  unless  a  part  of  the  quotation. 

Comma — 

141.  The  comma  is  "used  to  indicate  the  smallest  inter- 
ruptions in  continuity  of  thought  or  grammatical 
construction,  the  marking  of  which  contributes  to 
clearness"  {Century  Dictionary): 

"Here,  as  in  many  other  cases,  what  is  sometimes  popularly 
supposed  to  be  orthodox  is  really  a  heresy,  an  exaggeration, 
a  distortion,  a  caricature  of  the  true  doctrine  of  the  church. 
The  doctrine  is,  indeed,  laid  down  by  an  authority  here  and 
there;  but,  speaking  generally,  it  has  no  place  in  the  stand- 
ards, creeds,  or  confessions  of  the  great  communions;  e.g., 
the  Apostles'  Creed,  the  Nicene  Creed,  the  canons  of  the  early 
ecumenical  councils,  the  Westminster  Confession,  the  Thirty- 
nine  Articles."  "Shakspere  and  other,  lesser,  poets."  "The 
books  which  I  have  read  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  I  return 
those  [only]  which  I  have  read);  but:  "The  books,  which  I 
have  read,  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  having  read  them  [all], 
I  now  return  them).  "Gossiping,  women  are  happy;"  and: 
"Gossiping  women  are  happy."     "Of  these  four,  two  Ameri- 


50  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

cans  and  one  Englishman  started";  and:  "Of  these,  four — 
two  Americans  and  two  Englishmen — started."  "The  suffer- 
ing, God  will  relieve."  "Behind,  her  'stage  mother'  stood 
fluttering  with  extra  wraps."  "Some  boys  and  girls  pre- 
maturely announce  themselves,  usually  in  uncomfortable, 
sometimes  in  bad,  ways." 

142.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  proper  nouns  belonging 
to  different  individuals  or  places: 

"To  John,  Smith  was  always  kind";  "To  America,  Europe 
awards  the  prize  of  mechanical  skill." 

143.  Put  a  comma  before  "and,"  "or,"  and  "nor" 
connecting  the  last  two  links  in  a  sequence  of  three 
or  more;  or  all  the  links  in  a  series  of  greater  length, 
or  where  each  individual  link  consists  of  several 
words;  always  put  a  comma  before  "etc.": 

Tom,  Dick,  and  Harry;  either  copper,  silver,  or  gold;  "He 
was  equally  familiar  with  Homer,  and  Shakespere,  and 
MoUere,  and  Cervantes,  and  Goethe,  and  Ibsen";  "Neither 
France  for  her  art,  nor  Germany  for  her  army,  nor  England 
for  her  democracy,  etc." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  where  "and,"  etc.,  serves 
to  connect  all  of  the  links  in  a  brief  and  close-knit 
phrase : 

"a  man  good  and  noble  and  true";  "I  do  not  remember  who 
wrote  the  stanza — ^whether  it  was  Shelley  or  Keats  or  Moore." 

144.  Ordinarily,  put  a  comma  before  and  after  clauses 
introduced  by  such  conjunctions  as  "and,"  "but," 
"if,"  "while,"  "as,"  "whereas,"  "since,"  "because," 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  51 

"when,"  "after,"  "although,"  etc.,  especially  if  a 

change  of  subject  takes  place: 

"When  he  arrived  at  the  railway  station,  the  train  had  gone, 
and  his  friend,  who  had  come  to  bid  him  goodbye,  had 
departed,  but  left  no  word.  As  the  next  train  was  not  due 
for  two  hours,  he  decided  to  take  a  ride  about  the  town, 
although  it  offered  little  of  interest  to  the  sightseer.  While 
he  regretted  his  failure  to  meet  his  friend,  he  did  not  go 
to  his  house." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  before  clauses  introduced 

by  such  conjunctions  if  the  preceding  clause  is  not 

logically  complete  without  them;    nor  before  "if," 

"but,"   and    "though"    in   brief  and   close-welded 

phrases: 

"This  is  especially  interesting  because  they  represent  the  two 
extremes  and  because  they  present  differences  in  their  rela- 
tions"; "This  is  good  because  true";  "I  shall  agree  to  this 
only  if  you  accept  my  conditions";  "I  would  not  if  I  could, 
and  could  not  if  I  would";  "honest  though  poor";  "a  cheap 
but  valuable  book." 

145.  Such  conjunctions,  adverbs,  connective  particles  or 
phrases  as  "now,"  "then,"  "however,"  "indeed," 
"therefore,"  "moreover,"  "furthermore,"  "never- 
theless," "though,"  "in  fact,"  "in  short,"  "for 
instance,"  "that  is,"  "of  course,"  "on  the  contrary," 
"on  the  other  hand,"  "after  all,"  "to  be  sure," 
"for  example,"  etc.,  should  be  followed  by  a  comma 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or 
clause  to  introduce  an  inference  or  an  explanation, 
and  should  be  placed  between  commas  when  wedged 


52  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

into  the  middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause  to  mark  off  a 
distinct  break  in  the  continuity  of  thought  or  struc- 
ture, indicating  a  summarizing  of  what  precedes, 
the  point  of  a  new  departure,  or  a  modifying,  restrict- 
ive, or  antithetical  addition,  etc.: 

"Indeed,  this  was  exactly  the  point  of  the  argument"; 
"Moreover,  he  did  not  think  it  feasible  ";  "Now,  the  question 
is  this:  .  .  .  ."  "Nevertheless,  he  consented  to  the  scheme"; 
"In  fact,  rather  the  reverse  is  true";  "This,  then,  is  my 
position:  .  .  .  .";  "The  statement,  therefore,  cannot  be 
verified";  "He  thought,  however,  that  he  would  like  to 
try";  "That,  after  aU,  seemed  a  trivial  matter";  "The  gen- 
tleman, of  course,  was  wrong." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  with  such  words  when  the 
connection  is  logically  close  and  structurally  smooth 
enough  not  to  call  for  any  pause  in  reading;  with 
"therefore,"  "nevertheless,"  etc.,  when  directly 
following  the  verb;  with  "indeed"  when  directly 
preceding  or  following  an  adjective  or  another 
adverb  which  it  qualifies;  nor  ordinarily  with  such 
terms  as  "perhaps,"  "also,"  "likewise,"  etc.: 

"Therefore  I  say  unto  you  ....";  "He  was  therefore 
unable  to  be  present";  "It  is  nevertheless  true";  "He  is 
recovering  very  slowly  indeed";  "He  was  perhaps  thinking 
of  the  future";  "He  was  a  scholar  and  a  sportsman  too." 

146.  A  comma  is  preferably  omitted  before  "rather"  in 
such  an  expression  as — 

"The  time-value  is  to  be  measured  in  this  way  rather  than 
by  the  time-equivalent  of  the  strata." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  S3 

147.  If  among  several  adjectives  preceding  a  noun  the 
last  bears  a  more  direct  relation  to  the  noun  than  the 
others,  it  should  not  be  preceded  by  a  comma: 

"the  admirable  political  institutions  of  the  country";  "a  hand- 
some, wealthy  young  man." 

148.  Participial  clauses,  especially  such  as  contain  an 
explanation  of  the  main  clause,  should  usually  be 
set  off  by  a  comma: 

"Being  asleep,  he  did  not  hear  him";  "Exhausted  by  a  hard 
day's  work,  he  slept  like  a  stone." 

149.  Put  a  comma  before  "not"  introducing  an  anti- 
thetical clause: 

"Men  addict  themselves  to  inferior  pleasures,  not  because 
they  deliberately  prefer  them,  but  because  they  are  the  only 
ones  to  which  they  have  access." 

150.  For  parenthetical,  adverbial,  or  appositional  clauses 
or  phrases  use  commas  to  indicate  structurally 
disconnected,  but  logically  integral,  interpolations; 
dashes  to  indicate  both  structurally  and  logically 
disconnected  insertions;  never  use  the  two  together 
(see   175): 

"Since,  from  the  naturalistic  point  of  view,  mental  states  are 
the  concomitants  of  physiological  processes  .  .  .  .";  "The 
French,  generally  speaking,  are  a  nation  of  artists";  "The 
English,  highly  democratic  as  they  are,  nevertheless  deem 
the  nobility  fundamental  to  their  polidcal  and  social  systems." 
"There  was  a  time — I  forget  exact  date — when  these  condi- 
tions were  changed." 


54  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

151.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  two  identical  or  closely 
similar  words,  even  if  the  sense  or  grammatical  con- 
struction does  not  require  such  separation  (see  142) : 

"Whatever  is,  is  good";  "What  he  was,  is  not  known"; 
"The  chief  aim  of  academic  striving  ought  not  to  be,  to  be 
most  in  evidence " ;   "This  is  unique  only  in  this,  that  .  .  .  ." 

152.  In  adjectival  phrases,  a  complementary,  Cjualifying, 
delimiting,  or  antithetical  adjective  added  to  the 
main  epithet  preceding  a  noun  should  be  preceded 
and  followed  by  a  comma: 

"This  harsh,  though  perfectly  logical,  conclusion";  "The 
deceased  was  a  stern  and  unapproachable,  yet  withal  sym- 
pathetic and  kind-hearted,  gentleman";  "Here  comes  in  the 
most  responsible,  because  it  is  the  final,  office  of  the  teacher"; 
"The  most  sensitive,  if  not  the  most  elusive,  part  of  the 
training  of  children." 

153.  Two  or  more  co-ordinate  clauses  ending  in  a  word 
governing  or  modifying  another  word  in  a  following 
clause  should  be  separated  by  commas : 

".  .  .  .  a  shallow  body  of  water  connected  with,  but  well 
protected  from,  the  open  sea";  "He  was  as  tall  as,  though 
much  younger  than,  his  brother";  "The  cultivation  in  our- 
selves of  a  sensitive  feeling  on  the  subject  of  veracity  is  one  of 
the  most  useful,  and  the  enfeeblement  of  that  feeling  one  of 
the  most  hurtful,  things";  "This  road  leads  away  from, 
rather  than  toward,  your  destination." 

154.  Similarly,  use  a  comma  to  separate  two  numbers: 

"In  1905,  347  teachers  attended  the  convention";  November 
I,  1905.     (See  160.) 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  55 

155.  A  comma  is  employed  to  indicate  the  omission,  for 

bievity  or  convenience,  of  a  word  or  words,   the 

repetition  of  which  is  not  essential  to  the  meaning: 

"In  Illinois  there  are  seventeen  such  institutions;  in  Ohio, 
twenty-two;  in  Indiana,  thirteen";  "In  Lincoln's  first  cabinet 
Seward  was  secretary  of  state;  Chase,  of  the  treasury; 
Cameron,  of  war;  and  Bates,  attorney-general." 

Often,    however,    such    constructions    are    smooth 

enough  not  to  call  for  commas   (and  consequent 

semicolons) : 

"One  puppy  may  resemble  the  father,  another  the  mother, 
and  a  third  some  distant  ancestor." 

156.  A  direct  C|uotation,  maxim,  or  similar  expression, 
when  brief,  should  be  separated  from  the  preceding 
part  of  the  sentence  by  a  comma  (see  131) : 

"God  said,  Let  there  be  light." 

157.  Use  a  comma  before  "of"  in  connection  with  resi- 
dence or  position: 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mclntyre,  of  Detroit,  Mich.;  President  Hadley, 
of  Yale  University. 

Exceptions  are  those  cases,  historical  and  political,  in 

which  the  place-name  practically  has  become  a  part 

of  the  person's  name,  or  is  so  closely  connected  with 

this  as  to  render  the  separation  artificial  or  illogical: 

Clement  of  Alexandria,  Philip  of  Anjou,  King  Edward  of 
England. 

158.  Do  not  use  comma  between  consecutive  pages  in 
literary  references,  but  use  the  en-dash  (see  173). 


56  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

An  exception  may  be  made  in  the  case  of  scriptural 
references : 

pp.  4,  7-8,  10;    Ezra  5:7-8  (or  Ezra  5:7,  8). 

159.  Put  a  comma  after  digits  indicating  thousands, 
except  when  used  as  a  date  or  in  a  page-reference: 
1,276,  10,419;  January,  1909;  p.  2461. 

Note. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use. a  comma  with  four  figures. 

160.  Separate  month  and  year,  and  similar  time  divisions 
by  a  comma: 

November,  1905;  New  Year's  Day,  1906. 

Note. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  between  month  and  year. 

161.  Omit  the  comma,  in  signatures  and  at  the  beginning 

of  articles,  after  author's  name  followed  by  address, 

title,  or  position  in  a  separate  line,  or  after  address 

followed  by  a  date  line,  etc. : 

James  P.  Robinson 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Bird  Center,  111. 
James  P.  Robinson 

Superintendent  oj  Schools 
Bird  Center,  III. 
July  1,  1906 

162.  The  comma  is  always  placed  inside  the  cjuotation 
marks. 

Apostrophe — 

163.  An  apostrophe  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  a 
letter  or  letters  in  the  contraction  of  a  word,  or  of 
figures  in  a  number: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  57 

ne'er,  don't,  'twas,  "takin'  me  'at";  m'f'g;  the  class  of  '96. 
(See  123.) 

164.  The  possessive  case  of  nouns,  common  and  proper, 
is  formed  by  the  addition  of  an  apostrophe,  or 
apostrophe  and  s  (see  113): 

a  man's,  horses'  tails;  Scott's  Ivanhoe,  Jones's  farms,  Themis- 
tocles'  era;   for  appearance'  sake. 

165.  The  plural  of  numerals,  and  of  rare  or  artificial  noun- 
coinages,  is  formed  by  the  aid  of  an  apostrophe  and 
s;  of  proper  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending 
in  a  sibilant,  by  adding  an  apostrophe  alone  (mono- 
syllabic proper  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  es; 
others,  s) : 

in  the  1900's;  in  two's  and  three's,  the  three  R's,  the 
Y.M.C.A.'s;  "these  I-just-do-as-I-please's";  "all  the  Tommy 
Atkins'  of  England"  (but:   the  Rosses  and  the  Macdougals). 

Quotation  Marks.  (See  section  on  "Quotations,"  74- 
91.) 

Dashes — 

166.  A  dash  is  used  to  denote  "a  sudden  break,  stop,  or 

transition  in  a  sentence,  or  an  abrupt  change  in  its 

construction,    a   long   or   significant   pause,    or   an 

unexpected    or   epigrammatic    turn    of   sentiment" 

(John  Wilson) : 

"Do  we — can  we — send  out  educated  boys  and  girls  from  the 
high  school  at  eighteen  ?"  "The  Platonic  world  of  the  static, 
and  the  Hegelian  world  of  process — how  great  the  contrast!" 
"  'Process' — that  is  the  magic  word  of  the  modern  period"; 


58    .        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

"To  be  or  not  to  be — that  is  the  question";  "Christianity 
found  in  the  Roman  Empire  a  civic  life  which  was  impUcated 
by  a  thousand  roots  with  pagan  faith  and  cultus — a  state 
which  offered  little." 

167.  Use  dashes  (rarely  parentheses — see  177)  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  which  are  both  logically  and  struc- 
turally independent  interpolations  (see  150) : 

"This  may  be  said  to  be — but,  never  mind,  we  will  pass  over 
that";  "There  came  a  time — let  us  say,  for  convenience,  with 
Herodotus  and  Thucydides — when  this  attention  to  actions 
was  conscious  and  deliberate";  "If  it  be  asked — and  in  say- 
ing this  I  but  epitomize  my  whole  contention — why  the 
Mohammedan  religion  .  .  .  ." 

168.  A  clause  added  to  lend  emphasis  to,  or  to  explain  or 

expand,  a  word  or  phrase  occurring  in  the  main 

clause,   which   word    or   phrase   is   then  repeated, 

should  be  introduced  by  a  dash: 

"To  him  they  are  more  important  as  the  sources  for  history — 
the  history  of  events  and  ideas";  "Here  we  are  face  to  face 
with  a  new  and  difficult  problem — new  and  difficult,  that  is, 
in  the  sense  that  .  .  .  ." 

169.  Wherever  a  "namely"  is  implied  before  a  paren- 
thetical or  complementary  clause,  a  dash  should 
preferably  be  used  (see  132) : 

"These  discoveries — gunpowder,  printing-press,  compass, 
and  telescope — were  the  weapons  before  which  the  old  science 
trembled";  "But  here  we  are  trenching  upon  another  division 
of  our  field — the  interpretation  of  New  Testament  books." 

170.  In  sentences  broken  up  into  clauses,  the  final — 
summarizing — clause  should  be  preceded  by  a  dash 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  59 

"Amos,  with  the  idea  that  Jehovah  is  an  upright  judge 
.  .  .  .  ;  Hosea,  whose  Master  hated  injustice  and  falsehood 
.  .  .  .  ;  Isaiah,  whose  Lord  would  have  mercy  only  on  those 
who  relieved  the  widow  and  the  fatherless — these  were  the 
spokesmen  .  .  .  ." 

171.  A  word  or  phrase  set  in  a  separate  line  and  succeeded 

by  paragraphs,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  which  it 

is  impHed,  should  be  followed  by  a  dash: 

"I  recommend — 
"i.  That  we  kill  him. 
"2.  That  we  flay  him." 

172.  A  dash  should  be  used  in  connection  with  side- heads, 
whether  "run  in"  or  paragraphed: 

2.  The  language  0}  the  New  Testament. — The  lexicons 
of  Grimm-Thayer,  Cremer,  and  others  .... 
Note. — The  above  has  been  taken  from  .... 

Biblical  Criticism  in  Other  Denominations — 

A  most  interesting  article  appeared  in   the  Expository 
Times  .... 

173.  Use  a  dash  in  place  of  the  word  "to"  connecting 

two  words  or  numbers: 

May-July,  1906  (en-dash);  May  i,  1905 — November  i,  1906 
(em-dash);  pp.  3-7  (en-dash);  Luke  3:6 — 5:2  (em-dash). 

In  connecting  consecutive  numbers,  omit  hundreds 
from  the  second  number — i.e.,  use  only  two  figures 
— unless  the  first  number  ends  in  two  ciphers,  in 
which  case  repeat;  if  the  next  to  the  last  figure  in 
the  first  number  is  a  cipher,  do  not  repeat  this  in  the 
second  number: 


6o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

1880-95,  pp.  1 13-16;  1900-1906,  pp. 102-7. 

Note. — The   Astrophysical   Journal    repeals    the    hundreds: 
1880-1895,  pp.  113-116. 

174.  Let  a  dash  precede  the  reference  (author,  title  of 
work,  or  both)  following  a  direct  quotation,  consisting 
of  at  least  one  complete  sentence,  in  footnotes  or 
cited  independendy  in  the  text  (see  85) : 

.  ^  "I  felt  an  emotion  of  the  moral  sublime  at  beholding 
such  an  instance  of  civic  heroism." — Thirty  Years,  I,  379. 
The  green  grass  is  growing 

The  morning  wind  is  in  it, 
'Tis  a  tune  worth  the  knowing 
Though  it  change  every  minute. 

—Emerson,  "To  Ellen,  at  the  South." 

175.  A  dash  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  in  connection 
with  any  other  point,  except  a  period : 

"Dear  Sir:  I  have  the  honor  .  .  .  .";  not:  "Dear  Sir:— 
I  have  .  .  .  .";  "This — I  say  it  with  regret — was  noi  done " ; 
not:   "This, — I  say  it  with  regret, — was  .  .  .  ." 

Parentheses— 

176.  Place  between  parentheses  figures  or  letters  used  to 
mark  divisions  in  enumerations  run  into  the  text: 

"The  reasons  for  his  resignation  were  three:  (i)  advanced 
age,  (2)  failing  health,  (3)  a  desire  to  travel." 

If  such  divisions  are  paragraphed,  a  single  paren- 
thesis is  ordinarily  used  in  connection  with  a  lower- 
case (italic)  letter;  a  period,  with  figures  and  capital 
(roman)  letters.     In  syllabi,  and  matter  of  a  similar 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  6l 


character,    the   following   scheme   of   notation   and 
indention  should  ordinarily  be  adhered  to: 

A.  Under  the  head  of  ...  . 
I.  Under  .... 

1.  Under  .... 

a)  Under  .... 
(i)  Under  .... 

(a)  Under      .  .  . 

a)  Under  .... 
/3)  Under  .  .      . 

(b)  Under  .... 
(2)  Under  .... 

b)  Under  .... 

2.  Under 

IL  Under  .... 

B.  Under  the  head  of  ...  . 

177.  Parentheses  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  (see  150  and  167)  unless  confusion 
might  arise  from  the  use  of  less  distinctive  marks,  or 
unless  the  content  of  the  clause  is  wholly  irrelevant 
to  the  main  argument: 

"He  meant — I  take  this  to  be  the  (somewhat  obscure)  sense 
of  his  speech— that  .  .  .  .";  "The  period  thus  inaugurated 
(of  which  I  shall  speak  at  greater  length  in  the  next  chapter) 
was  characterized  by  .  .  .  .";  "The  contention  has  been 
made  {op.  cit.)  that  .  .  .  ." 

BR.A.CKETS — 

178.  Brackets  are  used  to  inclose  an  explanation  or  note, 
to  indicate  an  interpolation  in  a  quotation,  to  rectify 
a  mistake,  to  supply  an  omission,  and  for  ]mren- 
thescs  within  parentheses: 


62  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

'  [This  was  written  before  the  publication  of  Spencer's 
book. — Editor.] 

"These  [the  free-silver  Democrats]  asserted  that  the 
present  artificial  ratio  can  be  maintained  indefinitely." 

John  Ruskin.  By  Henry  Carpenter.  ["English  Men  of 
Letters,"  III.]     London:  Black,  1900. 

"As  the  Italian  [Englishman]  Dante  Gabriel  Ros[s]etti 
has  said,  .  .  .  ." 

Grote,  the  great  historian  of  Greece  (see  his  History,  I, 
204  [second  edition]),  .... 

179.  Sucli  plirases  as  'To  he  continued,'"  at  the  end,  and 
^^  Continued  from  .  .  .  ."  at  the  beginning,  of 
artic]es,  chapters,  etc.,  should  he  placed  between 
brackets,  centered,  and  set  in  italics  (see  73) : 

[Continued  from  p.  j2o] 
[To  be  concluded^ 

Ellipses — 

180.  Ellipses  are  used  to  indicate  the  omission  of  one  or 
more  words  not  essential  to  the  idea  which  it  is 
desired  to  convey.  For  an  ellipsis  at  the  beginning, 
in  the  middle,  or  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  four  periods, 
separated  by  a  space  (en-quad),  should  ordinarily 
be  used,  except  in  very  narrow  measures.  If  the 
preceding  line  ends  in  a  point,  this  should  not  be 
included  in  the  four.  Where  a  whole  paragraph,  or 
paragraphs,  or,  in  poetry,  a  complete  line,  or  lines, 
are  omitted,  insert  a  full  line  of  periods,  separated 
by  em-  or  2-em  quads,  according  to  the  length  of 
the  line.  But  the  periods  should  not  extend  beyond 
the  length  of  the  longest  type-line: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  63 

The  point  ....  is  that  the  same  forces  ....  are  still 

the  undercurrents  of  every  human  life We  may  never 

unravel  the  methods  of  the  physical  forces;  ....   but  .... 

I  think  it  worth  giving  you  these  details,  because  it  is  a 
vague  thing,  though  a  perfectly  true  thing,  to  say  that  it  was 
by  his  genius  that  Alexander  conquered  the  eastern  world. 

His  army,  you  know,  was  a  small  one.  To  carry  a  vast 
number  of  men  .... 

....  he  sought  the  lumberer's  gang, 
Where  from  a  hundred  lakes  young  rivers  sprang; 

Through  these  green  tents,  by  eldest  nature  drest. 
He  roamed,  content  alike  with  man  and  beast. 

181.  An  ellipsis  should  be  treated  as  a  part  of  the  citation; 
consequently  should  be  inclosed  in  the  quotation 
marks  (see  178). 

Hyphen-S — 

182.  A  hyphen  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line  terminating 
with  a  syllable  of  a  word,  the  remainder  of  which 
is  carried  to  the  next  line  (see  section  on  "  Divisions") 
and  between  many  compound  words. 

183.  Hyphenate  two  or  more  words  (except  proper  names 

forming  a  unity  in  themselves)  combined  into  one 

adjective  preceding  a  noun: 

so-called  Croesus,  well-known  author,  first-class  investment, 
better-trained  teachers,  high-school  course,  half-dead  horse, 
never-ceasing  strife,  much-mooted  question,  joint-stock  com- 
pany, English-speaking  peoples,  nineteenth-century  progress, 
white-rat  serum,    up-to-date   machinery,    four-year-old   boy, 


64  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


house-to-house  canvass,  go-as-you-please  fashion,  deceased- 
wife's-sister  bill;  but:  New  Testament  times,  Old  English 
spelling. 

Where  such  words  are  set  in  capitals  (e.g.,  in  head- 
lines), or  where  one  of  the  components  contains  more 
than  one  word,  an  en-dash  should  be  used  in  place 
of  a  hyphen : 

FRANCO-PRUSSIAN  WAR;  New  York-Chicago  freight 
traffic. 

But  do  not  connect  by  a  hyphen  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples with  adverbs  ending  in  "-ly";  nor  such 
combinations  as  the  above  when  following  the  noun, 
or  qualifying  a  predicate: 

highly  developed  species;  a  man  well  known  in  the  neighbor- 
hood; the  fly-leaf,  so  called;  "Her  gown  and  carriage  were 
strictly  up  to  date." 

184.  Hyphenate,  as  a  rule,  nouns  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  two  nouns  standing  in  objective  relation  to 
each  other — that  is,  one  of  whose  components  is 
derived  from  a  transitive  verb: 

mind-reader,  story-teller,  fool-killer,  office-holder,  well-wisher, 
property-owner;  hero-worship,  child-study;  wood-turning, 
clay-modeling. 

Exceptions  are  such  common  and  brief  compounds 

as — 

lawgiver,  taxpayer,  proofreader,  bookkeeper,  stockholder. 

185.  A  present  participle  united  (1)  with  a  noun  to  form  a 
new  noun  with  a  meaning  different  from  that  which 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  65 

would  be  conveyed  by  the  two  words  taken  separately, 
(2)  with  a  preposition  used  absolutely  (i.  •.,  not  gov- 
erning a  following  noun),  to  form  a  noun,  should 
have  a  hyphen: 

boarding-house,  dining-hall,  sleeping-room,  dwelling-place, 
printing-office,  walking-stick,  starting-point,  stepping-stone, 
stumbling-block,  working-man;  the  putting-in  or  taking-out 
of  a  hyphen. 

186.  As  a  general  rule,  compounds  of  "book  "  "house," 
"mill,"  "room,"  "shop,"  and  "work"  should  be 
printed  as  one  compact  word,  without  a  hyphen, 
when  the  prefixed  noun  contains  only  one  syllable, 
should  be  hyphenated  when  it  contains  two,  and 
should  be  printed  as  two  separate  words  when  it 
contains  three  or  more: 

handbook,    schoolbook,     notebook,    textbook;    pocket-book, 

story-book;    reference  book. 

boathouse,  clubhouse,  schoolhouse,  storehouse;  engine-house, 

power-house;  business  house. 

commill,  handmill,  sawmill,  windmill;  water-mill,  paper-mill; 

chocolate  mill. 

bedroom,  classroom,  schoolroom,  storeroom;    lecture-room; 

recitation  room. 

tinshop,  workshop;    bucket-shop,   tailor-shop;    policy  shop, 

blacksmith  shop. 

handwork,  woodwork;    metal-work;    filigree  work. 

Exceptions  are  rare  combinations  and  such  as  foi 
appearance'  sake  would  better  be  separated: 

source-book,  wheat-mill,  school  work. 


66  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

187.  Compounds  of  "maker,"  "dealer,"  and  other  words 
denoting  occupation  should  ordinarily  be  hyphen- 
ated; likewise  nouns  denoting  different  occupations 
of  the  same  individual: 

harness-maker,  book-dealer,  job-printer  (see  184);   a  soldier- 
statesman,  the  poet-artist  Rossetti. 

Exceptions    are    a    few    short    words    of    e'\'eryday 
occurrence : 
bookmaker,  dressmaker. 

188.  Compounds  of  "store"  should  be  hyphenated  when 
the  prefix  contains  only  one  syllable;  otherwise  not: 

drug-store,  feed-store  (but:    bookstore);    grocery  store,  dry- 
goods  store. 

189.  Compounds  of  "fellow"  are  always  hyphenated: 
fellow-man,  fellow-beings,  play- fellow. 

190.  Compounds  of  "father,"  "mother,"  "brother," 
"sister,"  "daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster"  should 
be  hyphenated: 

father-love  (but:    fatherland),  mother- tongue,  brother-officer, 
sister-nation,  foster-son,  daughter-cells,  parent-word. 

191.  Compounds  of  "great,"  indicating  the  fourth  degree 
in  a  direct  line  of  descent,  call  for  a  hyphen: 
great-grandfather,  great-grandson. 

192.  Compounds  of  " life"  and  "  world"  require  a  hyphen: 

life-history,  life-principle  (but:  lifetime),  world-power,  world- 
problem. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  67 


193.  Compounds  of  "skin"  with  words  of  one  syllable 
are  to  be  printed  as  one  word;  with  words  of  more 
than  one,  as  two  separate  words: 

calfskin,  sheepskin;  alligator  skin. 

194.  Compounds  of  "master"  should  be  hyphenated: 
master-builder,  master-stroke  (exception:    masterpiece). 

195.  Compounds  of  "god": 
sun-god,  rain-god. 

196.  "Half,"  "quarter,"  etc.,  combined  with  a  noun 
should  be  followed  by  a  hyphen : 

half-truth,  half-tone,  half-year,  half-title,  quarter-mile. 

197.  "Semi,"  "demi,"  "bi,"  "tri,"  etc.,  do  not  ordinarily 
demand  a  hyphen: 

semiannual,  demigod,  demiurge,  biweekly,  bipartisan,  bichro- 
mate, bimetallist,  trimonthly,  tricolor,  trifoliate. 

Exceptions  are  long  or  unusual  formations : 
semi-centennial,  demi-reUevo. 

198.  Compounds  of  "self"  are  hyphenated: 
self-evident,  self-respect. 

199.  Combinations  with  "fold"  are  to  be  printed  as  one 
word  if  the  number  contains  only  one  syllable;  if  it 
contains  more,  as  two: 

twofold,  tenfold;   fifteen  fold,  a  hundred  fold. 

200.  Adjectives  formed  by  the  suffixation  of  "like"  to 
a  noun  are  usually  printed  as  one  word  if  the  noun 
contains  only  one  syllable  (except  when  ending  in 


68  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

/);    if  it  contains  more  (or  is  a  proper  noun),  they 

should  be  hyphenated: 

childlike,  homelike,  warlike,  godlike;  eel-like,  bell-like; 
woman-like,  business-like;    American-like  (but:    Christlike). 

201.  "Vice,"  "ex  ,"  "elect."  "general,"  and  "lieutenant," 

constituting   parts   of   titles,    should   be   connected 

with  the  chief  noun  by  a  hyphen : 

Vice-Consul  Taylor,  ex-President  Cleveland,  the  governor- 
elect,  the  postmaster-general,  a  lieutenant-colonel. 

202.  Compounds  of  "by-"  should  be  hyphenated: 
by-product,  by-laws. 

203.  The  prefixes  "  CO-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  when  followed 
by  the  same  vowel  as  that  in  which  they  terminate, 
take  a  hyphen;  but,  as  a  rule,  they  do  not  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  different  vowel  or  by  a  consonant: 

co-operation,  pre-empted,  re-enter;  but:  coequal,  coeduca- 
tion, prearranged,  reinstal;  cohabitation,  prehistoric, 
recast  (re-read). 

Note. — The  Botanical  Gazette  prints:   cooperate,  reenter,  etc. 

Exceptions  are  combinations  with  proper  names,  long 
or  unusual  formations,  and  words  in  which  the 
omission  of  the  hyphen  would  convey  a  meaning 
different  from  that  intended: 

pre-Raphaelite,  re-tammanize;  re-postpone,  re-pulverization; 
re-formation  (as  distinguished  from  reformation),  re-cover 
(=cover  again),  re-creation. 

204.  Omit  the  hyphen  from  "today,"  "tomorrow," 
"tonight,"  "viewpoint,"  "standpoint."      (See  119.) 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  69 


205.  The  negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and  "a-"  do 
not  usually  require  a  hyphen: 

unmanly,  undemocratic,  inanimate,  indeterminate,  illimitable, 
impersonal,  asymmetrical. 

Exceptions  would  be  rare  and  artificial  combinations. 
The  particle  "non-,"  on  the  contrary,  ordinarily  calls 
for  a  hyphen,  except  in  the  commonest  words: 
non-aesthetic,  non-subservient,  non-contagious,  non-ability, 
non-interference,  non-unionist,  non-membership;  but:  nonage, 
nondescript,  nonessential,  nonplus,  nonsense,  noncombatant. 

206.  "Quasi"  prefixed  to  a  noun  or  an  adjective  requires 
a  hyphen: 

quasi-corporation,  quasi-historical. 

207.  "Over"  and  "under"  prefixed  to  a  word  should  not 

be  followed  by  a  hyphen,  except  in  rare  cases  (lengthy 

words,  etc.) : 

overbold,  overemphasize,  overweight,  underfed,  underestimate, 
undersecretary;  but:  over-soul,  under-man,  over-spiritualistic. 

208.  The  Latin  prepositions  "ante,"  "anti,"  "inter," 
"intra,"  "post,"  "sub,"  and  "super"  prefixed  to  a 
word  do  not  ordinarily  rec^uire  a  hyphen: 

antedate,  antechamber,  antediluvian,  antidote,  antiseptic  (but: 
anti-imperialistic— cf.  203),  international,  interstate,  intra- 
mural (but:  intra-atomic),  postscript,  postgraduate,  subtitle, 
subconscious,  superfine. 

Exceptions  are  such  formations  as- 
ante-bellum,  ante-Nicene,  anti-Semitic,  inter-univei-sity,  post- 
revolutionary. 


70  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

209.  "Extra,"  "infra,"  "supra,"  and  "ultra"  as  a  rule 
call  for  a  hyphen: 

extra-hazardous,  infra-mundane,  supra-temporal,  uUra-con- 
servative  (but:  Ultramontane). 

210.  In  fractional  numbers,  spelled  out,  connect  by  a 
hyphen  the  numerator  and  the  denominator,  unless 
either  already  contains  a  hyphen: 

"The  year  is  two-thirds  gone";  four  and  five-sevenths; 
thirty-hundredths;  but:   thirty-one  hundredths. 

But  do  not  hyphenate  in  such  cases  as — 

"One  half  of  his  fortune  he  bequeathed  to  his  widovi?;  the 
other,  to  charitable  institutions." 

211.  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  compound  words  occurring 
together,  which  have  one  of  their  component  elements 
in  common,  this  element  is  frequently  omitted  from 
all  but  the  last  word,  and  its  implication  should  be 
indicated  by  a  hyphen: 

in  English-  and  German-speaking  countries;  one-,  five-,  and 
ten-cent  pieces;  "If  the  student  thinks  to  find  this  character 
where  many  a  literary  critic  is  searching — in  fifth-  and  tenth- 
century  Europe — he  must  not  look  outside  of  manuscript  tra- 
dition." 

Note. — Some  writers  regard  this  hyphen  as  an  objectionable 
Teutonism. 

212.  A  hyphen  is  used  to  indicate  a  prefix  or  a  suffix,  as  a 
particle  or  syllable,  not  complete  in  itself: 

"The  prefix  a-";  "The  German  diminutive  sufhxes  -chen 
and  -kin." 


I 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION 


71 


213.  A  hyphen  is  employed  to  indicate  the  syllables  of  a 
word : 

di-a-gram,  pho-tog-ra-phy. 

214.  Following  is  a  list  of  words  of  everyday  occurrence 
which  should  be  hyphenated,  and  which  do  not  fall 
under  any  of  the  above  classifications: 


after-years 

bas-relief 

birth-rate 

blood-feud 

blood-relations 

common-sense 

cross-examine 

cross-reference 


cross-section  page-proof 

death-rate  pay-roll 

feast-day  poor-law 

folk-song  post-office 

food-stuff  sea-level 

fountain-head  sense-perception  well-being 

guinea-pig  son-in-law  well-nigh 

horse-power  subject-matter     will-power 


man-of-war 

object-lesson 

thought-process 

title-page 

wave-length 


72  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DIVISIONS 

215.  Avoid  all  unnecessary  divisions  of  words.  Wherever 
consistent  with  good  spacing,  carry  the  whole  word 
over  into  the  next  line. 

216.  Do  not,  in  wide  measures  (20  ems  or  more),  divide 
ori  a  syllable  of  two  letters,  if  possible  to  avoid 
it.  Good  spacing,  however,  is  always  paramount. 
Words  of  four  letters — like  on-ly — should  never  be 
divided;  words  of  five  or  six — like  oc-ciir,  of-fice, 
let-ter,  rare-ly — rarely. 

217.  Never  let  more  than  two  consecutive  lines  termi- 
nate in  a  hyphen,  if  at  all  avoidable.  The  next  to 
the  last  line  in  a  paragraph  ought  not  to  end  in  a 
divided  word;  and  the  last  line  (the  "breakline") 
should,  in  measures  of  15  ems  and  up,  contain  at 
least  four  letters.  Similarly,  try  to  avoid  a  broken 
word  at  the  bottom  of  a  right  hand  (recto)  page. 

218.  Do  not  divide  proper  nouns,  especially  names  of 
persons,  unless  absolutely  necessary. 

219.  Do  not  separate  (i.e.,  put  in  different  lines)  the 
initials  of  a  name,  or  such  combinations  as  a.d., 
P.M.,  etc. 

220.  Avoid  the  separation  of  a  divisional  mark,  e.g.,  {a) 
or  (i),  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  from  the  section 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  DIVISIONS  73 


which  it  precedes;  i.e.,  do  not  allow  such  mark  to 
fall  at  the  end  of  a  line,  but  carry  it  over  with  the 
matter  to  which  it  pertains. 

221.  Divide  according  to  pronunciation  (the  American 
system),  not  according  to  derivation  (the  English 
system) : 

democ-racy,  not:  demo-cracy;  hnowl-edge,  not:  know-ledge; 
aurif-erous,  not:  auri-jcrous;  antip-odcs  (still  better:  antipo- 
des— see  224),  not:   anti-podes. 

22  2.  However,  divide  on  etymological  lines,  or  according 
to  derivation  and  meaning,  as  far  as  compatible  with 
pronunciation  and  good  spacing: 

dis-pkasure  is  better  than  displeas-nre;  school-master,  than 
schoolmas-tcr. 

Shun  such  monstrosities  as — 
Passo-ver,  diso-bedience,  une-ven,  disa-bled. 

223,  Do  not  terminate  a  line  in  a  soft  c  or  ,?,  or  in  a  /. 
Escape  the  division  entirely,  if  possible;  if  not  pos- 
sible, divide: 

pro-cess,  not:  proc-ess;  ne-cessary,  not:  nec-essary;  spa-cing, 
not:  spac-ing  (the  rule  being  that  in  present  participles  the 
-ing  should  be  carried  over);  pro-gcny,  not:  prog-eny;  pre- 
judice, not:  prej-ndicc. 

Note. — This  rule  dilTcrs  from  that  followed  by  \\'cbstcr  and 
other  dictionaries. 

224.  Divide  on  a  vowel  wherever  practicable.  In  case  a 
vowel  alone  forms  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
run  it  into  the  first  line: 


74  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

sepa-rate,  not:  sep-arate;  particu-lar,  not:  partic-ular;  criti- 
cism, not:  crit-icism. 

Exceptions  are  words  in  -able  and  -ihle,  which  should 
carr}  the  vowel  over  into  the  next  line: 
read-able,  not:   reada-ble;  convert-ible,  not:   converti-ble. 

225.  In  hyphenated  nouns  and  adjectives  avoid  additional 

hyphens : 

object-lesson,  not:  object-lesson;  fellow-being,  not:  jel-low- 
being;  poverty-stricken,  not:  pov-erty-stricken,  much  less: 
pover-ty-stricken. 

226.  A  coalition  of  two  vowel-sounds  into  one  (i.e.,  a 
diphthong)  should  be  treated  as  one  letter.  There- 
fore do  not  divide,  if  there  is  any  escape: 

peo-ple  (either  syllable  makes  a  bad  division),  Cae-sar  (cf. 
218),  ail-ing. 

227.  In  derivatives  from  words  ending  in  /,  the  /,  in 
divisions,  should  be  carried  into  the  next  line  with 
the  suffix  if  the  accent  has  been  shifted ;  if  the  deriva- 
tive has  retained  the  accent  of  the  parent-word, 
the  /  should  be  left  in  the  first  line: 

objec-tive  (from  ob'ject) ;  deject-ive  (from  deject') . 

228.  The  addition  of  a  plural  s,  adding  a  new  syllable 
to  words  ending  in  an  5-sound,  does  not  create  a 
new  excuse  for  dividing  such  words: 

horses  and  circumstan-ces  are  impossible  divisions. 

229.  Adjectives  in  -kal  should  be  divided  on  the  /.• 
physi-cal,  not:  phys-ical  or  physic-al. 

230.  Do  not  divide  nothing. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   FOOTNOTES  75 


FOOTNOTES 

231.  For  reference  indices,  as  a  rule,  use  superior  figures. 

Only  in  special  cases  should  asterisks,  daggers,  etc., 

be  employed  (see  233) ;    for  instance,  in  tabular  or 

algebraic  matter,  where  figures  would  be  likely  to 

cause  confusion.     Index  figures  in  the  text  should  be 

placed  after  the  punctuation  marks: 

....  the  niceties  of  style  which  were  then  invading  Attic 
prose,'  and  which  made  .  . 

'  In  particular  ihe  avoidance  of  hiatus. 
*  Schenk's  equation. 

When  figures  are  not  used,  the  sequence  of  indices 

should  be: 

*  ("asterisk"  or  "star"),  f  ("dagger"),  %  ("double  dagger"), 
§  ("section  mark"),  I   ("parallels"),  t  ("paragraph  mark"). 

232.  Where  references  to  the  same  work  follow  each  other 
closely  and  uninterruptedly,  use  ibid,  instead  of 
repeating  the  title.  This  ibid,  takes  the  place  of  as 
much  of  the  previous  reference  as  is  repeated. 
Ibid,  should,  however,  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  the 
first  footnote  on  a  verso  (left-hand)  page;  it  is  better 
usage  either  to  repeat  the  title,  if  short,  or  to  use 
loc.  cit.  or  op.  cit.: 

'  Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology,  chap.  iv. 

2  Ibid. 

3  Ibid.,  chap.  v. 

4  Spencer,  loc.  cit. 


76  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

233.  Footnotes  to  tables,  whether  the  tables  are  ruled  or 
open,  should  be  in  6-pt.,  and  should  invariably  be 
placed  at  the  foot  of  the  table  and  not  at  the  foot  of 
the  page.  For  reference  indices  in  such  cases  use 
asterisks,  etc.,  and  not  superior  figures.     (See  231.) 

234.  If  the  author's  name  is  given  in  the  text  in  connec- 
tion with  a  reference  to,  or  a  quotation  from,  his 
work,  it  should  not  be  repeated  in  the  footnote: 

....  This  theory  is  questioned  by  Herbert,  as  follows: 
"I  cannot  admit  .  .  .  ."' 

'  Laws  0/  llie  Ancienis,  I,  153. 

235.  It  is  better  to  place  the  index  figure  in  the  text  after 
the  quotation  than  before  it  (see  illustration  above). 

236.  Ordinarily,  omit  "Vol.,"  "chap.,"  and  "p."  in 
references  to  particular  passages.  Use  Roman  numer- 
als (capitals)  for  Volume,  Book,  Part,  and  Division, 
except  in  reference  to  ancient,  classical  authors 
or  works,  when  lower-case  roman  numerals  should 
be  used;  Roman  numerals  (lower-case)  for  chapter 
and  pages  of  introductory  matter  (Preface,  etc.) ;  and 
Arabic  numerals  for  number  {Hejt)  and  text  pages. 
Only  when  confusion  would  be  liable  to  arise,  or  in 
exceptional  cases,  use  "  Vol.,"  "p.,"  etc.,  in  connection 
with  the  numerals.  In  classical  references  use  no 
comma  between  author's  name  and  the  title  of  his 
work;  and  no  comma  following  the  title,  unless 
"Vol.,"  "p.,"  or  some  kindred  symbol  is  used.  In 
all  references  to  divisions   of   classical  or   ancient 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   FOOTNOTES  77 


works,  use  periods  in  place  of  commas,  reserving 
the  comma  to  indicate  a  succession  (of  pages,  etc.) : 

■Miller,   French   Rev.    (2d  ed.;  London:   Abrahams,    1888), 
II,  Part  IV,  iii. 

2  S.   I.   Curtiss,  "The   Place   of   Sacrifice   among   Primitive 
Semites,"  Biblical  World,  XXI  (1903),  248  ff. 

3  Cicero  Do  officiis  i.  133,  140. 

The  same  practice  prescribed  for  classical  references 
is  frequently  desired  by  authors  with  respect  to 
English  references,  and  may  with  equal  propriety 
be  followed: 

I  W.  W.  Greg  Pastoral  Poetry  and  Pastoral  Drama  (London 
1906)  114. 

237.  The  date  of  publication  in  a  reference  to  a  periodical 
should  immediately  follow  the  volume  number,  and 
should  be  put  in  parentheses  (see  above  illustration). 

238.  In  work  set  on  the  linotype  machine  footnotes  should 
bu  numbered  consecutively  through  an  article,  in  a 
journal,  or  through  a  chapter,  in  a  book,  to  save 
resetting  in  case  of  change  (see  "  Hints  to  Authors 
and  Editors,"  note  under  "Footnotes,"  p.  102). 

Note. — Exceptions  to  these  rules  are  footnotes  in  the  Botani- 
cal Gazette,  the  Astro  physical  Journal,  Classical  Philolof^y,  and 
the  Classical  Journal,  which  have  adopted  the  following  styles: 

■  Botanical  Gazette — 

■  Livingston,  B.  E.,  (i)  On  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  which 
causes  the  change  in  form  of  polymorphic  green  algae.  BoT. 
G  AZETTE  30 : 289-3 17-   1 9°°- 

2 ,  (2)  The  heredity  of  sc.x.     Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool. 

40:187-218.   1903. 


78  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Astrophysical  Journal — 

'  "Revision  of  Wolf's  Sun-Spot  Relative  Numbers,"  Monthly 
Weather  Review,  30,  171,  1902. 

2  Astrophysical  Journal,  10,  ^^s,   1899. 

3  Wolf,  Astronomische  Mittheilungen,  No.  12,  i86r. 

Classical  Philology  and  Classical  Journal — 

1  Gilbert  Greek  Constitutional  Antiquities  199. 

2  G.  L.  Hendrickson  "Origin  and  Meaning  of  the  Ancient 
Characters  of  Style"  Am.  Jour.  Phil.  XXV  (1905)  250-75. 

1  Cicero  De  officiis  i.  133-36,  140. 

Biblical  World,  Botanical  Gazette,  Elementary  School  Teacher, 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and 
Literatures,  Journal  of  Sociology,  Journal  of  Theology,  School 
Review,  and  University  Magazine  number  their  footnotes  con- 
secutively throughout  an  article;  Astrophysical  Journal,  Classical 
Journal,  Classical  Philology,  Journal  of  Geology,  Modern  Philology 
from  I  up  on  each  page. 


I 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEXING  79 


INDEXING 

239.  In  indexes  and  other  alphabetical  lists  of  names  the 
following  rules  should  be  observed: 

a)  A  French,  Belgian,  or  Spanish  name,  preceded 
by  "le,"  "la,"  "T,"  "du,"  or  "des,"  should  be  Hsted 
under  the  letters  of  the  prefix  in  advance  of  the  ordi- 
nary "L"  or  "D"  list;  if  preceded  by  "de,"  or  "d'," 
under  the  first  letter  of  the  word  following  the  prefix, 
the  particle  in  such  a  case  being  placed  after  the 
initials  or  Christian  name: 

Le  Conte,  John;  La  Noue,  Frangois  de;  L'Estrange,  Sir 
Roger;  Du  Maurier,  George;  Des  Essarts,  Jean;  Estrees 
Gabrielled';  Rambeau,  Emile  de;  La  Mancha,  Don  Quixote 
de. 

Note. — If  the  particle  is  actually  a  part  of  the  surname,  the 
name  should  be  indexed  according  to  the  initial  letter  of  the 
particle:    De  Bey,  Robert;   De  Quincey,  Thomas. 

b)  German  names  preceded  by  "von"  should  be 
indexed  according  to  the  initials  of  the  name  follow- 
ing the  prefix: 

Sternthal,  Max  von;   Goethe,  J.  W.  von. 

c)  Names  beginning  with  "M',"  Mac,"  or  "Mc," 
with  the  following  letter  capitalized,  should  be  indexed 
in  the  above  order,  in  advance  of  the  ordinary  "M" 
list,  each  section  being  arranged  alphabetically 
according  to  the  letters  following  the  "M',"  "Mac," 
or  "Mc."     Names  beginning  with  "Mac,"  without 


8o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

the  following  letter  being  capitalized,  should  take 
their  natural  and  ordinary  places  in  the  alphabetical 
"M"list. 

d)  Names  preceded  by  "O',"  "St.,"  or  "Van," 
with  the  following  letter  capitalized,  should  be  placed 
in  advance  of  the  "O,"  "S,"  or  "V"  hst  and  should 
be  arranged  alphabetically  according  to  the  letter 
following  the  "O',"  "St.,"  or  "Van."  Names 
beginning  with  "Van,"  without  the  following  letter 
being  capitalized,  should  take  their  ordinary  places 
in  the  alphabetical  "V"  list. 

e)  Names  having  two  parts,  or  names  of  firms,  con- 
nected by  "and,"  "&,"  "y"  (Spanish),  or  "et" 
(French),  should  be  listed  according  to  the  first 
letter  of  the  name  preceding  the  connective. 

Smith  and  Evans  (under  "S");  Smith  &  Evans  (under  "S"); 
Gomez  y  Pineda,  Liberie  (under  "G");  Loubet  et  Meunier 
(under  "L"). 

/)  Hyphenated  names  should  be  listed  according 
to  the  name  following  the  hyphen,  if  English;  accord- 
ing to  the  name  preceding  the  hyphen,  if  French: 
Taylor,  Henry  Chandler-  (for  Henry  Chandler-Taylor); 
Saint-Saens,  Charles  Camille  (for  Charles  Camillc  Saint 
Saens). 

g)  On  the  subject  of  cross-references  see  62. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TABULAR  WORK  8l 


TABULAR  WORK 

240.  In  ii-pt.  and  lo-pt.  matter  open  (unruled)  tables 
should  ordinarily  be  set  in  9-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
8-pt.  solid.  In  9-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  8-pt.  solid.  In  8-pt.  matter 
open  tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
6-pt.  solid.  In  6-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  solid. 

241.  Captions  for  the  columns  of  open  tables  and  box- 
heads  for  ruled  tables  should  ordinarily  be  set  in 
6-pt.  In  ruled  tables  with  box-heads  of  several 
stories,  the  upper  story — primary  heads — should  be 
set  in  caps  and  small  caps;  the  lower — secondary — 
in  caps  and  lower-case.  Wherever  small  caps  are 
used  in  box-heads,  the  "stub"  (i.e.,  first  column) 
head  should,  as  a  rule,  also  be  set  in  caps  and  small 
caps. 

242.  In  ruled  tables  there  should  be  at  least  two  leads' 
space  between  the  horizontal  rules  and  the  matter 
inclosed,  and,  if  practicable,  at  least  the  equivalent 
of  an  en-quad,  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set,  between  the  perpendicular  rules  and 
the  matter  inclosed. 

243.  In  open  tables  set  by  hand,  periods,  one  em  apart 
and  aligned,  should  be  used  between  the  columns; 


82  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


when  set  on  the  hnotype  machine,  use  regular 
leaders.  In  ruled  tables,  in  the  "stub,"  leaders 
should  usually  be  employed,  if  there  is  room.  (A 
leader  is  a  piece  of  type,  having  dots  ["period 
leader"]  or  short  lines  ["hyphen  leader"]  upon 
its  face,  used  in  tables,  indexes,  etc.,  to  lead  the  eye 
across  a  space  to  the  right  word  or  number.) 

244.  In  columns  of  figures,  for  blanks  use  leaders  the 
width  of  the  largest  number  in  the  column;  that  is, 
for  four  digits  use  a  2-em  leader,  etc.  (each  em 
containing  two  dots;  in  no  case,  however,  should  less 
than  two  dots  be  used).  Center  the  figures  in  the 
column;  if  they  cannot  be  put  in  the  exact  center, 
and  there  is  an  unequal  number  of  digits  in  the 
groups,  leave  more  space  on  the  left  than  on  the 
right. 

245.  When  there  is  reading-matter  in  the  columns  of  a 
ruled  table,  it  should  be  centered,  if  possible;  if  any 
line  runs  over,  use  hanging  indention,  and  align  all 
on  the  left. 

246.  All  tables,  and  the  individual  columns  in  tables 
should  be  set  to  even  picas,  or  nonpareils,  if 
practicable. 

247.  Double  rules  should  be  used  at  the  top  of  all  tables, 
but  perpendicularly,  as  a  usual  thing,  only  when  a 
table  is  doubled  up  on  itself. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TABULAR  WORK 


83 


248.  Tables  of  two  columns  only  should  be  set  as  open; 
of  three  or  more,  as  ruled. 

249.  "Table  I,"  etc.,  in  headlines  of  tables  should  ordi- 
narily be  set  in  caps  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set;  the  following  (descriptive)  line,  if 
any,  in  caps  and  small  caps  of  the  same  type.  A 
single  (descriptive)  headline,  not  preceded  by  the 
number  of  the  table,  should  be  set  in  caps  of  the  type 
in  which  the  table  is  set. 

250.  Specimen  tables  for  illustration: 

TABLE  I 

Series  of  Heads  of  Bands  in  the  Spectrum  of  Barium 

Fluoride 


Series 

A 

B 

C 

I 

2 

■I 

20111 .0 
20197.8 
19842.7 
19711.7 
19416. 2 
19531-9 

-0.4302 

-0.441 

-0.4362 

-0.35765 

-0.3932 

-0.479 

9.034 
7.06 

13-522 
16.715 
10.618 

4 

c 

6 

7.19 

TABLE  II — Continued 


Series  C 

Series  C 

m 

N  obs. 

A^  calc. 

m 

AT  obs. 

N  calc. 

0 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

17094.8 
100.6 
106.4 
112.  2 
116. 5 
120.8 

17095.0 
100.8 
106.3 
III. 4 
116.  2 
120.6 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

17 124. 6 
128.3 

131-7 
134-6 

137-3 

17124.7 
128.4 
13I-7 
134-7 
137-4 

84 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


TABLE  SHOWING  DISTRIBUTION  OF  EMPLOYEES 


No.  OF 
Facto- 
ries 

Number  of  Employees 

States 

Men 

Women 

Boys       Girls 

Total 

Illinois        

527 
117 

245 
203 

370 

12,306 

4,075 
6,714 
5,923 
8,451 

809 
618 

338 
414 

5" 

"5       23 
79         5 
35        ■• 

'26         6 

13,253 

Wisconsin    

Minnesota   

Michigan 

4,777 
7,087 

6,337 

Indiana    

8,994 

Total    

1,462 

37,469 

2,690 

255       34 

40,448 

Settings 


We 

dge 

0 

5 

10 

13 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

143  I 

14.5-5 

158-3 

187. 1 

142.4 

144 

3 

160.9 

186.9 

1430 

143 

8 

159.6 

184.8 

142.2 

144 

0 

I5Q-3 

186.2 

144-2 

142.68 

144  S4 

15952 

186.2s 

Diaph.  I  over  i... 
Diaph.    0.29  cm.     over 

wedge. 
Reading  of  pointer,  with 

meter-sticlc     touching 

Si  and  screen  163.66 

cm. 


TABLE  V 

Element  No.  of  Lines 

Ca 6 

Fe II 

Cr 9 

V II 

Al 2 

Sr I 

Mn 3 

Ti 2 


TECHNICAL  TERMS 


EXPLANATION  OF  TECHNICAL  TERMS 

The  Point  System — 

251.  The  point  is  the  underlying  unit  of  all  typographical 
measures. 

252.  The  standard  of  measurement  is  the  pica.     A  pica 
is  twelve  points  (one-sixth  of  an  inch). 

This  line  is  set  in  12-pt.  {pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  ii-pt.  {small  pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  lo-pt.  {long  primer). 
This  line  is  set  in  9-pt.  {bourgeois). 
This  line  is  set  in  8-pt.  {brevier). 
This  line  is  set  in  y-pt.  {minion). 
This  line  is  set  in  6-pt.  (nonpareil). 
This  line  is  set  in  5-pt.  (pearl) . 

The  sizes  larger  or  smaller  than  these  are  seldom 
used  in  book  composition. 

Styles  of  Type — 

253.  Ordinary  type  is  called  roman.  To  "roman-quote" 
is  to  put  in  roman  type  between  quotation  marks. 

This  line  is  set  in  roman. 

254.  Type  with  a  sloping  face  is  called  italic  or  italics. 
Italic  is  indicated  in  manuscripts  by  a  straight  line 
under  the  word  or  words.     (See  p.  iii.) 

This  line  is  set  in  italics. 

87 


88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

255.  Type  with  a  heavy  black  face  is  called  hold-jace. 
Bold-face  is  indicated  by  a  wavy-line.     (Sec  p.  iii.) 

This  line  is  set  in  bold-face. 

256.  The  body  of  a  type  is  called  the  shank;  the  upper 
surface,  bearing  the  character,  the  face;  the  part 
of  the  face  projecting  beyond  the  shank,  the  kern; 
the  part  of  the  shank  projecting  beyond  the  face, 
the  shoulder. 

257.  A  font,  or  complete  assortment  of  a  given  size,  of 
type  includes  large  capitals  ("caps^'),  small  capitals 
("small  caps^^),  and  lower-case  letters  (so  called  from 
being  placed  in  the  lower  half  of  the  printer's  case). 
Caps  are  indicated  by  three  straight  lines;  small 
caps,  by  two.     (See  p.  in.) 

THESE  ARE  CAPS  OF  9-PT.  ROMAN. 

THESE   ARE   SMALL   CAPS   OF   9-PT.    ROMAN. 

These  are  lower-case  of  g-pt.  roman. 

Spacing — 

258.  An  ejti,  em-quad,  or  simply  quad  (  =  quadrat)  is  a 
block  of  type  the  top  of  which  forms  a  perfect 
square.  A  12-pt.  quad  is  thus  a  piece  of  metal 
one-sixth  of  an  inch  square  at  the  ends.  The  term 
em  is  also  used  of  the  size  of  such  a  square  in  any 
given  size  of  type  as  a  unit  of  measurement. 
"Indent  8-pt.  2  ems"  thus  means  that  the  line  should 
be  indented  16  points.  An  em-dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  em. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS  89 

259.  Two-  and  three-cm  quads  are  multiples  of  the  above, 
cast  in  one  block  of  type-metal.  Two-  and  three-em 
dashes  are  dashes  the  width  of  2-  and  3 -em  quads 
respectively. 

260.  An  en-quad  is  half  the  size  of  an  em-quad  in  width. 
Thus  an  8-pt.  en-quad  is  4  points  wide  (thick)  and 
8  points  long  (deep).  An  en-dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  en-quad. 

261.  A  three-em  space  is  one-third  of  an  em  in  thickness. 
This  is  also  called  a  thick  space,  and  is  the  standard 
space  used  to  separate  words. 

262.  A  jour-cm  space  is  one-fourth  of  an  em;  a  -five-em 
space  is  one-fifth  of  an  em.  Four-  and  5 -em  spaces 
are  also  called  middle  and  thin  spaces. 

263.  A  hair-space  is  any  space  thinner  than  a  5-em. 

This     line     is     spaced     with     em-quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  en-quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  3 -em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  4-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  5-em  spaces. 

The  letters  in  this  word  are  hair-spaced:   America. 

This  is  a  3 -em  dash:  

This  is  a  2-em  dash:  

This  is  an  em-dash:  — 
This  is  an  en-dash :  - 

264.  Space  evenly.  A  standard  line  should  have  a  3-em 
space  between  all  words  not  separated  by  other 
punctuation  points  than  commas,  and  after  commas; 


90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

an  en-quad  after  semicolons,  and  colons  followed  by 
a  lower-case  letter;  two  3 -em  spaces  after  colons 
followed  by  a  capital;  an  em-quad  after  periods, 
and  exclamation  and  interrogation  points,  conclud- 
ing a  sentence.  If  necessary  to  reduce,  begin  with 
commas,  and  letters  of  slanting  form — i.e.,  with  a 
large  "shoulder"  on  the  side  adjoining  the  space;  if 
■  necessary  to  increase,  begin  with  overlapping  let- 
ters— i.e.,  with  "kerns"  protruding  on  the  side 
adjoining  the  space — straight-up-and-down  letters, 
and  points  other  than  periods  and  commas  (in  this 
order).  In  a  well-spaced  line,  with  a  3-em  space 
between  a  majority  of  the  words,  there  should  not 
be  more  than  an  en-quad  between  the  rest;  this 
proportion  should  be  maintained  in  increasing  or 
reducing.  To  justify  a  line  is  to  adjust  it,  making 
it  even  or  true,  by  proper  spacing. 

265.  Do  not  follow  an  exceptionally  thin-spaced  line  with 
an  exceptionally  wide-spaced  one,  or  vice  versa,  if 
at  all  avoidable. 

266.  Never  hair-space,  or  em-quad,  a  line  to  avoid  a 
run-over. 

267.  Do  not  space  out  the  last  line  of  a  paragraph  allowing 
of  an  indention  of  an  em  or  more  at  the  end. 

268.  Short  words,  like  "a",  "an,"  etc.,  should  have  the 
same  space  on  each  side. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS  91 

269.  Use  a  thin  space  after  §,  ^,  and  similar  signs;  before 
"f.,"  "ff.,"  and  the  metric  symbols: 

"§14.     Be  it  further  ordained  .  .  .  .";    pp.  10  ff.;  16  cm. 

270.  In  American  and  English  sums  of  money  no  space 
is  used  between  the  symbols,  $  and  £  (pounds), 
s.  (shillings)  and  (/.  (pence),  and  the  numerals: 

$2.75;    £10  y.  2d. 

271.  After  Arabic  numerals  at  the  beginning  of  lines, 
denoting  subsections,  there  should  be  an  en-quad; 
after  Roman  numerals,  an  em-quad.  After  Roman 
numerals  in  cap,  cap-and-small-cap,  or  small-cap 
center-heads  there  should  be  an  em-quad.  Small- 
cap  headings  should  have  an  en-quad  between  the 
words;  cap-and-small-cap  and  cap  headings,  two 
3 -em  spaces. 

272.  Scripture  references  should  be  spaced  thus: 
II  Cor.  1 :  16-20;   2:5 — 3:12. 

273.  Between  letters  forming  products,  and  before 
superior  figures  or  letters  indicating  powers,  and 
inferior  figures  or  letters,  ordinarily  no  space  should 
be  used: 

Ai  v'  =  2m^  {v^z^  —  2vwyz  -\-  2'w^y') . 

Indentation  (Printer's  Term:    Indention) — 

274.  In  measures  of  less  than  10  picas'  width,  indent  all 
sizes  I  em.     In  measures  of  from  10  to  20,  indent 


92  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ii-pt.,  I  em;  lo-pt.,  i|;  9-pt.,  i;^;  8-pt.,  i\;  6-pt.,  2. 
In  measures  of  from  20  to  30,  indent  11 -pt.  i|  ems; 
lo-pt.,  iV;  9-pt.,  i§;  8-pt.,  2;  6-pt.,  2h.  This  is 
for  plain  paragraphs.  In  hanging  indentions,  in 
measures  of  less  than  10  picas,  indent  all  sizes 
I  em;  from  10  to  20,  ii-pt.,  lo-pt.,  9-pt.,  and  8-pt., 
i^  ems;  6-pt.,  2  ems;  from  20  to  30,  ii-pt.,  lo-pt., 
■9-pt.,  and  8-pt.,  2  ems;  6-pt.,  3  ems. 

275.  In  poetry,  center  the  longest  line  and  let  the  inden- 
tion be  governed  by  that;  unless  the  longest  line 
is  of  disproportionate  length,  in  which  case  an 
average  of  the  long  lines  should  be  struck,  the  idea 
being  to  give  the  whole  a  centered  appearance. 
Where  quotations  from  different  poems,  following 
each  other  in  close  succession,  vary  but  slightly  in 
length  of  verse  lines,  it  is  better  to  indent  all  alike. 
Indent  according  to  rhymes  and  length  of  lines. 
In  blank  verse,  where  the  lines  are  approximately  of 
the  same  length,  they  should  be  aligned.  If  con- 
secutive lines  rhyme,  they  should  likewise,  as  a  rule, 
be  aligned.  If  the  rhymes  alternate,  or  follow  at 
certain  intervals,  indent  the  rhyming  lines  alike;  that 
is,  if,  e.g.,  lines  i  and  3,  and  2  and  4,  rhyme,  set  the 
former  flush  in  the  measure  previously  determined  by 
the  longest  line,  and  indent  the  latter  (usually  one 
em) ;  follow  this  scheme  in  any  similar  arrangement. 
If  any  line  is  disproportionately  short — that  is,  con- 
tains a  smaller  number  of  feet — indent  it  more: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS  93 

And  blessed  are  the  horny  hands  of  toil ! 
The  busy  world  shoves  angrily  aside 
The  man  who  stands  with  arms  akimbo  set, 
Until  occasion  tells  him  what  to  do. 

I  laugh  at  the  lore  and  the  pride  of  man, 
At  the  sophist  schools  and  the  learned  clan ; 
For  what  are  they  all,  in  their  high  conceit. 
When  man  in  the  bush  with  God  may  meet  ? 

So  nigh  is  grandeur  to  our  dust, 

So  near  is  God  to  man. 
When  Duty  whispers  low,  "Thou  must," 

The  youth  replies,  "I  can." 

Not  lightly  fall 

Beyond  recall 
The  written  scrolls  a  breath  can  float; 

The  crowning  fact. 

The  kingliest  act 
Of  Freedom  is  the  freeman's  vote! 

276.  In  ordinary  reading-matter  "plain  paragraphs" 
are  always  preferable.  Where  it  is  desired  to  bring 
into  relief  the  opening  word  or  words  of  a  paragraph, 
or  the  number  introducing  such  paragraph,  or  where 
a  center-head  makes  more  than  three  lines,  "  hanging 
indention"  is  often  employed.     (See  284.) 

Leads — 

277.  A  lead  is  a  strip  of  metal  used  to  separate  lines  of 
type.  The  ordinary  (standard)  lead  is  2  points 
thick.  Matter  with  leads  between  the  lines  is 
called  leaded;   without,  solid. 


94  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

This  book  for  the  most  part,  is  set  leaded.  This  paragraph, 
for  illustration,  and  the  Index  are  set  solid.  Nearly  all  books 
are  leaded. 

278.  A  slug  is  a  strip  of  metal,  thicker  than  a  lead,  used 
in  the  make-up  of  printed  matter  into  pages,  to  be 
inserted  after  headlines,  etc.  The  two  standard 
sizes  are  6  and  12  points  (a  nonpareil  and  a  pica) 
thick,    respectively. 

Heads  or  Headings — 

279.  A  center-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  equal  distances 
from  both  margins  of  the  page  or  column.  Center- 
heads  are  usually  set  in  caps  or  in  small  caps.  This 
is  a  center-head: 

SEC.   Vn.      THE   PRINCIPLES   OF   SOCIOLOGY 

When  such  center-head  makes  more  than  one  line, 
either  the  (inverted)  "pyramid"  form  (for  two  or 
three  hnes)  or  "hanging  indention"  (for  more  than 
three  lines)  is  employed: 

ART   EDUCATION   FOR  THE   AMERICAN   PEOPLE,   AS   SHOWN   AT 

THE     LOUISIANA     PURCHASE     EXPOSITION,    IN    THE 

NORMAL   SCHOOLS,   AND   IN   ART   SCHOOLS 

ON  CERTAIN  IMPLICATIONS  OF  POSSIBLE  CHANGES  IN  THE 
FORM  AND  DIMENSIONS  OF  THE  SUN,  AND  SOME  SUGGES- 
TIONS TOWARD  EXPLAINING  CERTAIN  PHENOMENA  OF 
VARIABLE   ST.ARS 

280.  A  side-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
page  or  column.  It  may  either  be  set  in  a  separate 
line,  in  which  case  it  is  usually  set  flush — that  is,  in 
alignment  with  the  margin  of  the  type-page;  or 
run  in — that  is,  run  together  in  a  continuous  line 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   TECHNICAL  TERMS  95 

with  the  paragraph  to  which  it  belongs.     The  latter 

is  the  more  common  form.     Side-heads  are  most 

frequently  set  in  italics;  sometimes  in  caps  and  small 

caps  or  in  bold-face  (see  172) : 

Side-head — 

A  side-head  is  a  headline  .... 
Side-head. — A  side-head  is  ...  . 
Side-head. — A  side-head  is  ...  . 

Side-head — 

A  side-head  is  ...  . 

281.  A  cut-in  head  is  a  head  placed  in  a  box  cut  into 
the  side  of  the  type-page,  usually  set  in  different 
type,  and  as  a  rule  placed  under  the  first  two  lines 
of  the  paragraph: 

In  making  inquiry,  therefore,  into  the  value  of  fraternity 
life  among  the  children,  it  is  necessary  to  test  it  entirely  in 

accordance  with  its  power  to  contribute  to  the 
Infl       ce       welfare  of  the  school  as  a  social  whole.     The 

school,  being  a  social  organization,  has  a  right 
to  demand  that  every  individual  contribute  the  best  that  is 
in  him  to  the  good  of  all.     In  making  this  contribution,  it 

282.  A  box-head  is  a  head  for  a  column  in  a  ruled  table. 
(See  250.) 

283.  A  running-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  top  of 
each  page  of  a  book,  etc.,  usually  giving  the  main 
title  of  the  work  on  the  left-hand  (verso)  page,  and 
the  title  of  the  chapter,  or  other  subdivision,  on 
the  right-hand  (recto)  page.  A  good  working  rule 
for  running-heads  is  to  set  them  in  roman  or  italic 


g6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

capitals  two  sizes   (points)    smaller  than   the  type 
of  the  text. 

Paragraphs — 

284.  Two  kinds  of  paragraphs  are  distinguished — plain 
and  hanging.  A  plain  (or  regular)  paragraph  has 
the  first  line  indented,  and  the  others  set  flush.  A 
hanging  paragraph  {"hanging  indention^^)  has  the 

■  first  line  set  flush,  and  the  others  indented: 

Human  Nature  and  the  Social  Order.     By  Charles  Horton 

CoOLEY.     New  York:    Scribner,  1902.      Pp.  viii  +  404. 

In  terms  of  his  own  thesis  Dr.  Cooley  has  transformed 

the  social  materials  of  his  times  into  a  personal  product; 

his    mind   has    reorganized   and    reproduced    the    suggested 

Proofs — 

285.  A  galley-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  contained 
in  a  long,  shallow  receptacle  of  metal,  known  as  a 
galley,  into  which  the  compositor,  operator,  or  cast- 
ing-machine places  the  material  as  is  it  set,  line  by 
line. 

286.  A  page-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  material 
made  up  into  page-form. 

287.  A  plate-proof  or  foundry-proof  is  a  proof  taken  of  the 
type-page  immediately  before  an  electrotype  cast  is 
made  of  it.  This  proof  has  a  black  border  around 
the  pages,  made  by  ink  from  the  metal  frame  used 
to  hold  the  type  in  place  while  the  cast  is  being 
made.  Most  publications  nowadays  are  printed 
from  such  plates,  and  not  directly  from  the  type. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS  97 

288.  A  foul  proof  is  a  galley-proof  containing  author's 
corrections. 

289.  A  revise  is  a  new  proof  of  type  corrected  from  a 
marked  proof. 

Make-up — 

290.  The  arranging  into  page-form  of  type-lines  is  called 
the  make-up. 

291.  A /0//0  is  a  page-number.  Even  numbers  are  placed 
on  the  verso;  odd,  on  the  recto.  A  drop-folio  is  a 
page-number  placed  at  the  bottom  of  a  page. 

292.  A  half-title  or  bastard  title  is  the  abbreviated  title  of 
a  book  placed  on  a  separate  page  preceding  the  full 
title-page,  or  the  title  of  a  part,  chapter,  etc.,  preced- 
ing such  part  or  chapter  on  a  separate  page  in  the 
body  of  the  book. 

Typesetting  Machines— 

293.  The  linotype — named  Mergenthaler  after  its  invent- 
or— is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching 
a  keyboard,  the  matrices  from  which  the  characters 
are  cast  arrange  themselves  automatically  in  lines 
in  a  receptacle,  which  then  is  brought  in  contact, 
on  the  same  machine,  with  molten  type-metal, 
through  a  mechanical  device  which  liberates  and 
arranges  in  order  on  a  galley  the  stereotyped  strips, 
called  "slugs,"  each  consisting  of  a  line  of  type. 


98  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

294.  The  monotype — named  Lanston  after  the  patentee — 
is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching  a  key- 
board, perforations  are  made  in  strips  of  paper,  which 
then  are  transferred  to  a  second  machine,  where  the 
matrices  to  which  the  perforations  correspond  are 
brought  in  contact  with  molten  type-metal,  the 
characters  being  cast  separately  and  arranged  auto- 
•  matically  on  a  galley  in  justified  lines. 


APPENDIX 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS 

Preparation  of  Manuscripts — 

Manuscripts  should  be  either  typewritten  or  in  a 
perfectly  clear  handwriting.     The  former  is  preferable. 

The  sheets  should  be  of  uniform  size;  9"Xii"  is  a 
desirable  size. 

Only  one  side  of  the  paper  should  be  used. 

Never  roll  manuscripts;  place  them  flatly  in  a  box 
or  an  envelope. 

The  sheets  should  not  be  fastened  together  except  by 
pins  or  clips,  which  can  easily  be  removed. 

When  one  piece  of  a  page  is  to  be  fastened  to  another, 
use  mucilage,  not  pins.  Pins  are  liable  to  become 
unfastened,  and  the  slips  lost  or  misplaced. 

Liberal  margins  should  be  left  at  the  top  and  left- 
hand  side  of  the  sheets.  This  space  will  be  needed  by 
the  reader  or  printer  for  directions. 

The  pages  should  be  numbered  consecutively. 
Inserted  and  omitted  pages  should  be  clearly  indicated. 
Thus,  sheets  to  be  inserted  after  p.  4  should  be  marked 
"4A,"  "4B,"  etc.;  sheets  omitted  between  p.  4  and  p.  8 
should  be  indicated  by  numbering  p.  4,  "4-7." 

Additions  to  original  pages  should  be  placed  after  the 
sheets  to  which  they  belong,  and  should  be  marked 
"Insert  A,"  "Insert  B,"  etc.     The  places  where  they  are 

lOI 


IC2  JKE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


to   be   inserted   should   be   indicated   by   writing,  "Here 
insert  A,"  etc.,  on  the  margin  of  the  original  pages. 

Paragraphs — 

Paragraphs  should  be  plainly  indicated,  either  by 
indenting  the  first  line  or  by  a  ^  mark. 

Footnotes — 

Footnotes  should  be  clearly  designated,  either  by 
separating  them  from  the  text  by  running  a  line  across 
the  page,  or  by  using  ink  of  different  color.  Some  writers 
make  a  perpendicular  fold  in  the  paper,  using  two- 
thirds  of  the  space  for  the  text  and  one-third  for  the 
notes. 

The  word  in  the  text  carrying  the  note  should  be  followed 
by  a  superior  figure  corresponding  to  that  preceding  the 
note. 

Footnotes  should  never  be  run  into  the  text  in  manu- 
scripts, whether  in  parentheses  or  otherwise. 

Note. — It  is  important  to  remember  that  in  matter  set  on  the 
Hnotype  machine  the  slightest  change  necessitates  the  resetting  of  the 
whole  line.  Since  it  is  impossible  to  foresee  how  the  notes  will  happen 
to  come  out  in  the  make-up,  it  is  impracticable  to  number  them  from  i 
up  on  each  page.  The  best  way  is  to  number  them  consecutively  through- 
out an  article  or  by  chapters  in  a  book;  bearing  in  mind,  however,  the 
very  essential  point  that  the  change,  by  omission  or  addition,  of  one  single 
number  involves  the  resetting  of  the  whole  first  line  of  each  succeeding  note 
to  the  end  of  the  series. 

This  difficulty  is  not  met  with  in  matter  set  on  the  monotype  machine 
or  by  hand,  where  the  change  of  a  number  amounts  simply  to  substituting 
one  figure  for  another 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS  103 

Proper  Names,  etc. — 

Proper  names,  foreign  words,  and  figures  should,  in 
handwritten  manuscript,  be  written  with  the  utmost  care 
and  distinctness. 

Title-Pages,  etc. — 

Copy  for  title-pages,  prefaces,  tables  of  contents,  etc., 
should  be  submitted  with  the  manuscript.  Copy  for 
indexes  should  be  compiled  from  the  special  set  of  page- 
proofs  furnished  for  this  purpose,  and  promptly  delivered 
to  the  printers.  Unnecessary  delay  is  often  caused  by 
postponing  these  details  till  the  last  minute. 

Reading  of  Proofs— 

Read  and  return  your  proofs  promptly. 

In  marking  proof-sheets,  use  the  standard  proofreaders' 
marks  (see  p.  iii).  Do  not  adopt  a  system  of  your  own, 
which,  however  plain  it  may  seem  to  you,  is  liable  to  appear 
less  so  to  the  compositor. 

Be  careful  to  answer  all  c^ueries  in  the  proofs.  Delays 
and  errors  often  result  from  not  attending  to  them. 

Remember  that  changes  in  the  type  cost  money.  The 
omission  or  addition  of  a  word  in  the  middle  of  a  para- 
graph may  necessitate  resetting  the  whole  of  this  from 
that  point  on;  and  if  such  alteration  is  made  in  the  page- 
proof,  it  may  furtlicr  involve  repaging  the  entire  article 
or  chapter.  Make  your  manuscript  as  perfect  as  possible 
before  delivering  it  to  the  printer.  Any  necessary  altera- 
tions should  be  made  in  the  galley-proof,  as  each  succeed- 


I04  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ing  stage  will  add  to  the  cost.  Corrections  in  plates  should 
be  studiously  avoided.  Not  only  are  they  expensive,  but 
they  are  apt  to  injure  the  plates. 

The  original  manuscript  should  in  each  instance  be 
returned  with  the  galley-proof,  in  order  that  the  proof- 
reader may  refer  to  it,  should  any  question  arise;  and 
each  successive  set  of  proofs  returned  should  be  accom- 
panied by  the  previous  marked  set.  This  will  assist  in 
calculating  the  cost  of  alterations  properly  chargeable  to 
you. 


I 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  105 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS 

Read  everything  as  if  you  yourself  were  the  author. 

Be  particularly  careful  about  proper  names  and  figures. 
If  the  copy  is  not  perfectly  clear,  or  if  you  have  reason  to 
doubt  its  correctness,  look  it  up,  or  query  it  to  the  author. 

In  asking  questions  of  authors  or  editors,  make  your 
point  clear.  A  simple  query  is  often  not  enough  to  draw 
attention  to  the  particular  point  you  have  in  mind. 
Queries  in  the  manuscript  should  be  transferred  to  the 
proof,  or  attention  should  be  directed  in  the  manuscript  to 
the  proof. 

Be  discreet  about  your  queries.  Do  not  stultify  your- 
self and  discredit  the  office  by  asking  foolish  questions 
on  the  proof.  The  author  will  be  thankful  for  any  sensible 
suggestion  you  may  make,  but  will  resent  trivial  criticisms. 

Make  a  study  of  the  "personal  equation"  in  the  case 
of  those  individuals  (editors  and  others)  with  whom  you 
as  a  proofreader  will  constantly  have  to  deal.  One  person 
may  expect  of  you  as  a  matter  of  course  what  another 
might  regard  as  an  unwarranted  interference. 

Never  hesitate  to  correct  anything  that  is  palpably 
wrong,  however  positively  the  copy  may  assert  the  con- 
trary. Remember  that  the  blame  for  the  error  will 
eventually  be  laid  at  your  door,  and  justly  so. 

Do  not  follow  copy  blindly,  unreasoningly.  Follow 
copy  only  when,  and  as  far  as,  it  is  correct.     Whether  or 


io6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

not  it  is  correct,  you  are  the  judge.  Such  an  excuse  as, 
"I  thought  the  copy  was  edited";  or,  "I  thought  the 
author  knew  what  he  wanted,"  is  no  excuse  at  all. 

Do  not  ask  authors  or  editors  to  decide  questions  of 
style.  The  Mamial  oj  Style  is  primarily  meant  for  you. 
Learn  its  rules  so  that  you  may  correct  any  violation  of 
them   you   may   come   upon,   without  asking   questions. 

Do  not  fall  into  the  fallacy  that  the  author's  or  editor's 
O.K.  relieves  you  of  all  or  any  part  of  your  responsibility. 
Authors  and  editors  depend  on  the  proofreader  to  see  to 
it  that  the  typographical  requirements  have  been  met, 
and  that  the  adopted  style  has  been  adhered  to,  and 
affix  their  signatures  only  on  that  supposition. 

Do  not  shield  yourself  behind  your  copyholder.  The 
copyholder  is  there  to  assist  you,  not  to  tell  you  how  to 
do  things.  If  you  think  you  have  cause  to  doubt  her 
version  of  a  matter,  investigate  for  yourself. 

Do  not  suggest  to  the  copyholder  the  reading  of  a  word 
or  phrase  which  she  has  difficulty  in  making  out  from  the 
manuscript.  If  she  cannot  decipher  the  manuscript, 
remember  that  you  are  the  arbiter,  and  not  the  compositor. 

Do  not  permit  yourself  to  be  stampeded.  Cultivate 
speed,  but  remember  that  accuracy  is  even  more  impor- 
tant. If  the  necessary  time  is  not  given  you,  take  it — 
within  reasonable  limits — in  order  to  do  things  right. 
The  credit  accruing  to  you  from  doing  things  absolutely 
right  is  likely  to  outlast  the  displeasure  at  your  lack  of 
dispatch. 

In  unavoidable  cases  of  "rush,"  where  conditions  and 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  107 

orders  are  imperative,  protect  yourself  by  letting  it  be 
understood  that  you  ha\'e  done  your  best  in  the  time  allot- 
ted you,  but  that  you  must  disclaim  any  further  responsi- 
bility. 

Put  your  initial  at  the  top  of  every  galley  you  read 
or  revise.  This  will  save  time  in  tracing  proofs,  and  insure 
the  giving  of  credit  where  it  belongs. 


io8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS 

Cultivate  a  low,  soft,  clear  reading-voice.  Only  your 
own  proofreader  has  to  hear  you. 

Remember  that,  from  the  proofreader's  point  of  view, 
the  small  words  are  as  essential  as  the  big  ones.  Get 
them  all  in — and  get  them  in  right. 

Enunciate  your  plural  5's  distinctly. 

Do  not  get  offended  when  your  reader  asks  you  to 
repeat,  or  to  look  at  the  copy  for  himself. 

Regulate  and  equalize  your  speed.  Do  not  race  at  a 
break-neck  pace  through  typewritten  copy,  while  you 
thread  your  path  fumblingly  through  the  mazes  of  manu- 
script. 

Do  not  keep  guessing  at  a  word.  Look  at  it  closely, 
consider  the  context,  and  do  not  speak  it  until  you  have 
made  it  out— or  at  least  made  the  very  best  guess  of  which 
you  are  capable. 

Sit  at  right  angles  to  your  reader,  if  possible.  He 
hears  you  better,  and  you  can  watch  his  hand  better,  if 
you  do. 

Give  your  reader  a  chance  to  make  his  corrections. 
Slow  up  the  moment  he  puts  his  pencil  to  the  paper. 
This  will  save  you  going  over  the  same  ground  twice. 

Evolve  your  own  system  of  signals.  Do  not,  for 
instance,  waste  time  by  saying  "in  italics"  for  every  word 
or  letter  so  treated.     Instead,  raise  vour  voice,  or  tap 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS  109 

the  table  with  your  pencil  once  for  each  word,  or  both. 
Such  a  code  need  not  be  intelligible  to  others  than  your- 
self and  your  reader. 

Do  not  waste  time  over  matters  of  style.  The  proof- 
reader is  supposed  to  know  the  rules  without  your  telling 
him;  for  instance,  what  titles  are  to  be  set  in  italics,  and 
what  roman-quoted. 

Be  careful  in  transferring  marks.  A  mark  in  the  wrong 
place  means  two  errors  uncorrected  in  place  of  one  cor- 
rected. 

In  sending  out  proofs,  see  that  everything  is  there. 
Arrange  the  copy  and  proof-sheets  neatly  and  consecu- 
tively. 

Never  send  out  proofs,  for  the  first  time,  without  con- 
sulting the  job  ticket  for  the  number  wanted,  and  the  name 
and  address  of  the  person  to  whom  they  are  to  be  sent. 

The  manuscript  should  accompany  the  galley-proof; 
the  foul  proof  (author's  marked  galley-proof)  should 
accompany  the  page-proof.  In  case  no  galley-proof  has 
been  sent,  the  manuscript  should  accompany  the  page- 
proof. 

Indicate  in  the  lower  left-hand  corner  the  contents  of 
all  the  envelopes  you  address. 

Fasten  your  pins  in  the  center  at  the  top,  not  diago- 
nally in  the  left-hand  corner,  thus  covering  up  the  direc- 
tions, etc.,  often  written  there. 

Return  every  evening  to  the  file  or  the  bookcase  any 
volume  that  may  have  been  taken  out  for  reference  during 
the  day. 


no  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Remember  that  you  are  the  housekeeper  of  the  proof- 
room, and  take  pride  in  its  neat  and  orderly  appearance. 
Keeping  the  records,  files,  etc.,  naturally  devolves  upon 
you.  Perfect  your  system  so  that  everything  can  be 
located  at  a  moment's  notice.  The  more  of  that  kind  of 
work  you  do  without  being  asked,  and  the  better  you  do 
it,  the  more  you  will  be  appreciated. 


i 


cafes 


PROOFREADER'S  MARKS 

€apitalBt 
Put  in  SMALL  CAPITALS. 


s.c.  

jl,  c.  Put  in  LOWER  CADE 


■  c. 


Put  in  roimm  type. 
ial.       Put  in  italio  type. 
6o€<i       Put  in  bold  faco  type. 
§5        Dele,  or  delete :  take  X out. 
9         Letter  reversed — turn, 
D/  ^    Indent,  ^ake  a  new  paragraph. 
4|:  Put  inspace. 

3       Clq]se  up — no  space. 
Y(\      Bad   spacing- space  more  evenly 


jur. 


i.      Wrong  fo^t :  character  of  wrong  size  or  style, 
tfc.        Transp|(|e. 
I  [Xarry  to  the  left. 

I    Ci.rry  to  the  right, 
f""!      "ETevate. 
l_l       Depress. 

X        I  j^  perfect  letter — correct. 
^i'       Space  shows|between  wofds — shove  down. 

Straighten  crooked  line. 

Restore  or  retain  words  crossed  out. 

Print  {St,  n,  etc.)  as  a  logotype. 


out-iee^l^   Words  are  omitted  from,  or  in,  copy. 
Query  to  author:  Is  this  right? 


Ill 


INDEXES 


I 


INDEX  TO  MANUAL 


[The  numbers,  unless  othenvise  indicated,  refer  to  sections] 


"A"  and  "an":  use  of,  before  h  and  u, 
114;    spacing  of,  268. 

'a-"  (negative  particle),  compounds  with, 
205. 

Abbreviations:  in  literary  references,  no; 
of  biblical  and  apocryphal  books,  list 
of,  109;  of  names  of  states,  106;  of  titles 
of  publications,  omission  of  period  after 
initials  used  for,  123;  rules  for.  106-11; 
use  of  apostrophe  in,  123;  of  period 
after,  123. 

"-able"  and  "-ible,"  in  divisions,  224. 

Academic  degrees,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  21-22. 

Accents,  retention  of,  in  foreign  words 
incorporated  into  English,  50. 

.Acquired,  limited,  or  special  meaning, 
words  having,  capitalization  of,  25. 

Acts,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names  of, 

18. 
A.D.  {anno  Domini):  spacing  of,  52,  219; 

use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 

Address,  capitalization  of  titles  in  direct, 
21. 

Address  line:  at  end  of  letters,  etc.,  how  to 
set,  50;  at  opening  of  letters,  etc.,  how 
to  set,  64;  omission  of  comma  after,  161. 

.\ddresses,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

.•Vdjectives :  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;  compound,  183; 
capitalization  of,  derived  from  proper 
nouns,  i;  ending  in  "ical."  how  to 
divide,  229;  omission  of  comma  between 
two,  147;  proper,  capitalization  of,  i 
(cf.  5,  53). 

.Administrative  bodies,  capitalization  of 
names  of,   12. 

.Adverbial  clauses,  150. 

.-Vdvcrbs:  capitalization  of.  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;  ending  in  "ly,"  not 
to  be  hyphenated  with  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples. 183;  use  of  comma  in  connec- 
nection  with,  145. 

a,  rules  for  use  of,  115. 


Ages:  historical,  linguistic,  and  geological, 
capitalization  of,  14;  to  be  spelled  out, 
99. 

Algebraic  formulae:  letters  used  to  desig- 
nate unknown  quantities  in,  67;  spacing 
of,  273. 

Alignment,  quotation  marks  to  be 
"cleared"  in,  90. 

Alliances,  poKtical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  16. 

Alphabetizing  of  names,  rules  for,  239. 

A.M.  (ante  meridiem):  52,219;  use  of  small 
caps  for,  52. 

.American  system  of  divisions,  221. 

"Ampersand":   definition   of,   107;    when 

used,  107. 
And:    "short,"  107;    when  to  use  comma 

before,   143. 

.Anglicized  derivatives  from  Latin  and 
Greek,  form  of  diphthongs  ce  and  iv  in, 
IIS- 

".Ante,"  compounds  with,  208. 

"Anti,"  compwunds  with,  208. 

.Antithetical  clauses,  149. 

.Apocrypha:  list  of  abbreviations  for,  109; 
titles  of,  to  be  set  in  roman,  60. 

.Apostles,  omission  of  "St."  in  connection 
with  names  of,  108. 

.Apostrophe:  rules  for  use  of,  163-65;  use 
of,  in  abbreviations,  123;  to  form 
plural  of  numerals,  165;  to  form  pos- 
sessive, 164  (cf.  113);  to  mark  omis- 
sion of  figures  or  letters,  163  (cf.  123). 

Appositional   clauses,    150. 

.Arabic  numerals,  spacing  of,  at  beginning 
of  paragraphs,  271. 

.Art,  titles  of  works  of,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  84. 

Article:  definite,  not  to  be  used  in  connec- 
tion with  "Rev."  and  "Hon.,"  92; 
not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of  peri- 
odicals, 41;  indefinite,  form  of,  before 
eu,  sounded  h,  "one,"  etc.,  and  long  u, 
114. 


"5 


ii6 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Articles,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Artifkial  noun  formations,  plural  of,  165. 

Artistic  schools,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

"As  follows,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  132. 

Asterisk,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  231. 

Astronomical  terms:  capitalization  of' 
48;   use  of  italics  for,  71. 

Astro  physical  Journal:  connecting  num- 
bers in,  173,  note;  metric  and  chemical 
symbols  in,  123,  note;  style  for  footnotes 
in,'  238,  note;  use  of  comma  with  figures 
in,   159,  note. 

Authors:  hints  to,  pp.  101-4;  names  of, 
if  in  text,  not  repeated  in  footnotes,  234. 

Bastard  title.     See  Half-title. 

B.C.   ("before   Christ"):     spacing  of,   52, 

219;   use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 
"Bi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 
Bible:    books  of,  abbreviations  for,   100; 

capitalization  of  names  for,   29;    titles 

of  books  of,  to  be  capitalized,  31;   to  be 

set  in  roman,  60. 
Biblical:    books,   abbreviations  for,    109, 

and    capitalization    of    names    of,    31; 

parables,  capitalization  of,   32;    terms, 

miscellaneous,    capitalization   of,    33. 

Bills,  legislative,  capitalization  of,  18. 
Biological  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,   46. 
Black-face.     See  Bold-face  type. 
Blank  verse,  indention  of,  275. 

Blanks,  use  of  leaders  for,  in  columns  of 
figures,   244. 

Blocks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

Bodies:  legislative,  judiciary,  and  admin- 
istrative, capitalization  of  names  of,  12; 
military,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Bold-face  type:  defined,  255;  how  indi- 
cated, 255. 

"Book,"  compounds  of,  i86. 

Books:  biblical,  abbreviation  of,  109,  and 
capitalization  of,  31;  capitalization  of 
titles  of,  41;   italics  for  titles  of,  60. 

Botanical  Gazette:  exception  to  rule  for 
capitalization  of  titles  of  publications 
in,  41,  note;  to  hyphenization  of  com- 
pound'; of  "co-,"  etc.,  203,  note;  to  rule 
for  italics,  60,  note;  to  rule  for  quotation 
marks,   82,   note;     metric   symbols    in. 


123,  note;  footnotes  in,  238,  note;  thou- 
sands in,  159,  note. 

Botanical  terms:  u^e  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  46,  71. 

Bourgeois,  explained,  252. 

Box-heads:  defined,  282;  how  to  ret, 
241,  illustrated,  250;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;  use  of  capitals  in, 
41. 

Brackets,  rules  for  use  of,  178-79. 

Break,  or  change,  in  sentence,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,   166. 

Breakline:   defined,  217;   spacing  of,  267. 

Brevier,  explained,  252. 

"Brother,"  compounds  of,  190. 

"Brothers,"    forming    part    of     name    of 

firm,  107. 
Buildings,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 
But-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 

with,  144. 
"By-,"  compounds  with,  202. 

C,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Capitalization:  of  abbreviations  of  aca- 
demic degrees,  etc.,  22;  of  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  nouns,  i;  of 
adjectives  and  nouns  designating  defi- 
nite geographical  regions.  5;  of  books 
of  the  Bible,  31;  of  conventions,  con- 
gresses, expositions,  etc.,  17;  of  creeds 
and  confessions  of  faith,  19;  of  Egyptian 
dynasties,  13;  of  epithets,  used  as  proper 
names,  2;  of  feast-days,  20;  of  geo- 
graphical names,  4-5;  of  geological 
epochs.  14;  of  governmentaldepartmenls, 
12;  of  historical  epochs,  14;  of  important 
events,  15;  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and 
administrative  bodes,  n;  of  linguistic 
and  literary  periods,  14;  of  miscella- 
neous terms,  33;  of  miscellaneous 
historical  terms,  16;  of  monastic  orders, 
10;  of  names  for  the  Bible,  29;  of 
names  of  regiments,  13;  of  names  and 
epithets  of  peoples,  races,  and  tribes,  47; 
of  names  of  bodies  of  solar  systern,  48; 
of  "nature,"  etc.,  and  abstract  ideas, 
personified,  26;  of  nouns  and  adjectives 
used  to  designate  the  .Supreme  Being, 
or  any  member  of  the  Trinity,  24;  of 
organizations  and  institutions,  11-12; 
of  particles  (in  French,  Dutch,  German 
names),  3;  of  philosophical,  literary, 
and  artistic  schools,  9;  of  political  alli- 
ances, 16;  of  political  divisions,  6-7; 
of  political  parties,  9;  of  pronouns 
referring  to  the  Supreme  Being,  24;  of 
proper  nouns  and  adjectives,  i,  s,  53; 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


117 


of  regions  or  parts  of  world,  5;  of  reli- 
gious denominations,  q;  of  sessions  of 
Congress,  13;  of  thoroughfares,  parks, 
squares,  blocks,  buildings,  etc.,  8;  of 
titles,  academic  degrees,  orders  (decora- 
tions), etc.,  21  (cf.  49);  of  titles  of  publi- 
cations, 41;  of  treaties,  acts,  laws,  bills, 
etc.,  18;  of  versions  of  the  Bible,  30; 
of  words  with  an  acquired,  limited,  or 
special  meaning,  25;  verbs  derived  from 
proper  names,  not  capitalized,  i;  rules 
for,  I-S7- 

Capitals:  how  indicated,  257;  rules  for 
use  of,  1-49. 

Capitals  and  small  capitals,  rules  for  use 
of,  so,  51- 

Caps.     See  Capitals. 

Center-heads:  defined,  279;  illustrated, 
279;   use  of  capitals  in,  41. 

Centuries,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled  out, 
100. 

Cf.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

Chapters,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Chemical  symbols,  how  to  treat,  123. 

Christian  names,   to  be  spelled   out,   93. 

"Church,"  when  capitalized,  28. 

Church  fathers:  omission  of  "St."  in  con- 
nection with  names  of,  108;  when  capi- 
talized,   27. 

Citations:  from  different  authors  follow- 
ing each  other  uninterrupted  by  any 
intervening  original  matter,  75;  of  pas- 
sages in  author's  own  words,  74  (cf. 
85);  rules  for  reduction  of,  85-87;  for 
punctuation  of,  112. 

Civil  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

Classical  Journal,  form   of  footnotes  in, 

238,  note. 
Classical    Philology,    form    of    footnotes 

in,  238,  note. 
Classical  references,  rules  for  punctuation, 

236,  238,  note. 
Clauses:      adverbial,     150;      antithetical, 

149;  appositional,  150;  complementary, 

169",     conjunctive,    144;     parenthetical, 

150,    167,    169,    177;     participial,    148; 

summarizing,  170. 

"Cleared,"  definition  of,  90. 

"Co-,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Colon:  definition  and  illustration  of  use 
of,  131;  rules  for  use  of,  131-36;  use 
of,  after  salutatory  phrase  at  beginning 
of  letters,  133;    between  place  of  publi- 


cation and  publisher's  name,  135;  in 
connection  with  introductory  remarks 
of  speaker,  133;  to  emphasize  close 
connection  between  two  clau.ses,  131; 
to  introduce  statement,  extract,  etc., 
131;  to  separate  chapter  and  verse  in 
Scripture  passages,  134;  clause  from 
illustration  or  amplification,  131;  hours 
and    minutes  in   time-indications,   134. 

Columns  of  figures,  spacing  of,  244. 

Combination  of  words  into  one  adjective 
preceding  noun,  use  of  hyphen  for,  183. 

Comma:  definition  and  illustrations  of 
use  of,  141;  omission  of,  between  two 
adjectives,  147;  in  signatures  and  after 
author's  name  at  beginning  of  articles, 
161;  use  of,  after  digits  indicating 
thousands,  159;  before  "and,"  "or," 
and  "nor,"  143;  before  "of"  in  con- 
nection with  residence  or  position,  157; 
omission  of,  between  consecutive  pages, 
etc.,  158;  between  month  and  year,  160; 
in  connection  with  adjectival  plirases, 
152;  omitted  before  "rather,"  146; 
with  adverbial  clauses,  150;  with  anti- 
thetical clauses,  149;  with  appositional 
clauses,  150;  with  brief  quotations  or 
maxims,  156;  with  clauses  ending  in 
different  prepositions,  153;  with  con- 
junctions, 144;  with  conjunctions,  ad- 
verbs, connective  particles,  and  phrases, 
145;  with  parenthetical  clauses,  150; 
with  participial  clauses,  148;  to  indicate 
omissions,  155;  to  separate  identical,  or 
similar,  words,  151;  to  separate  num- 
bers, 154;  to  separate  proper  nouns, 
142;   rules  for  use  of,  141-62. 

Commercial:  firms,  how  to  treat  titles  of, 
107;  organizations  and  institutions 
capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

"Company,"  to  be  abbreviated  when 
forming  part  of  name  of  firm,  107. 

Complementaty  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 
connection  with,  169. 

Component  elements,  omission  of,  in  com- 
pound words,  211. 

Compound  adjectives,   183. 

Compound  words,  omission  of  element 
common  to  two  or  more,  to  be  indicated 
by  hyi)hen,  211. 

Compounds:  hyphenated,  capitalization 
of  nouns  constituting  parts  of,  in  titles, 
4S;  of  "book,"  "house,"  "mill," 
"room,"  "shop,"  "work,"  186;  of 
"father,"  "mother,"  "brother,"  "sister," 
"daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster," 
190;  of  "fellow,"  189;  of  "god,"  19s; 
of    "half,"    "quarter,"    etc.,    196;     of 


ii8 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


"life"  and  "world,"  192;  of  "maker" 
and  "dealer,"  187;  of  "master,"  194; 
of  present  participles  with  nouns  or 
prepositions,  185;  of  "self,"  198;  of 
"skin,"  193;  of  "store,"  188;  with 
"ante,"  "anti,"  "inter,"  "intra," 
"post,"  "sub,"  and  "super,"  208; 
with  "by-,"  202;  with  "co-,"  "pre-," 
and  "re-,"  203;  with  "extra  "  "infra," 
"supra,"  and  "ultra,"  209;  with  "fold," 
199;  with  "great"  in  lines  of  descent, 
191;  with  "like,"  200;  with  negative 
particles  "um-,"  "in-,"  and  "a-,"  205; 
with  "non-,"  205;  with  "over"  and 
"under,"  207;  with  "quasi,"  206; 
with."semi,"  "demi,"  "tri-,"  "bi,"  etc., 
197;  with  "vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect," 
"general,"  and  "lieutenant,"  in  titles, 
201. 

Confessions  of  faith,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  19. 

Congress:  capitalization  of  names  of 
houses  of,  12;  of  sessions  of,  13;  mem- 
bers of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21;  numbers 
of  sessions  of,   to  be  spelled  out,    100. 

Congresses,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

Conjunctions,  use  of  comma  in  connection 
with,  145. 

Connective  particles,  use  of  comma  in 
connection  with,  145. 

"Continued":  after  headlines  to  be  set  in 
italics,  73;  at  end  of  articles,  etc.,  to  be 
placed  between  brackets,  179. 

Contraction  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
in,  163. 

Conventions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

Copjholders,  hints  to,  pp.  108-10. 

Creeds,    capitalization   of   names   of,    19. 

Cut-in-heads:  defined  and  illustrated, 
281;  omission  of  period  after,  125;  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

Cycles  of  poems,  titles  of:'  capitalization 
of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  itali- 
cized, 60. 

"Czar,"  when  capitalized,  21. 

Dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  231. 

Danish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42. 

Dashes:  definition  and  illustrations  of  use 
of,  166;  different  sizes  of,  explained, 
258-60;  illustrated,  263;  rules  for  use  of, 
166-75;  use  of.  at  end  of  word  or  phrase 
implied  at  beginning  of  each  of  .succeed- 
ing paragraphs,  171;  for  emphasis,  168; 
in  connection  with  literary  references, 
174;     with    other    points,     175;     with 


parenthetical  clauses,  168-69;  with 
complementary  clauses,  169;  to  connect 
numbers,  173;  to  denote  break,  stop, 
transition,  or  change  in  sentence,  166; 
to  precede  summarizing  clauses,  170. 

Dates:  of  publications,  to  follow  volume 
numbers  in  references  to  periodicals, 
237;  St.  d,  and  th  to  be  omitted  from, 
102;  use  of  comma  between  month  and 
year  in,  160. 

"Daughter,"  compounds  of,  190. 

"De,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  239. 

"Dealer,"  compounds  of,  187. 

Decades,  references  to,  to  be  spelled  out, 

lOI. 

Decorations,  capitalization  of  names  of,  21. 

Degrees,  academic,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  21-22. 

"Demi,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Denominations,  religious,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  9. 

Departments:  governmental,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  12;  of  University  of 
Chicago,  49. 

Derivation,  division  according  to,  221-22. 

Derivatives:  from  Greek  and  Latin,  115; 
from  proper  names,  53;  from  words 
ending  in  /,  how  to  divide,  227. 

Diagrams,  letters  referring  to,  68. 

Digraphs.     See  Ligature. 

Diphthongs,  to  be  treated  as  one  letter  in 

divisions,  226. 
Divided  word  to  be  avoided:    at  end  of 

next  to  last  line  of  paragraph,  217;    at 

bottom  of  recto  page,  217. 

Division  of  words:  rules  for,  215-30; 
systems  of,  221;  use  of  hyphen  to  indi- 
cate, 182;  avoidance  of  unnecessary, 
215;  on  two  letters,  to  be  avoided,  216. 

Divisional  mark  in  middle  of  .sentences, 
not  to  be  put  at  end  of  line.  220. 

Divisions  of  publications,  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Divisions,  political:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  6-7;  numbered,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Divisions    of    the  University  of    Chicago 

capitalization  of  names  of,  49. 
Documents,    titles    of:     capitalization    of 

principal  words  in,  41;    to  be  italicized, 

60  (cf.  18). 
Double  dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 

231- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


119 


Double  rules,  use  of,  in  tables,  247. 

Doubt,  use  of  interrogation  point  to  ex- 
press,   I2Q. 

Drop-folio,  defined,  291. 

Dutch  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals  in,   42. 

Dynasties,  Egyptian:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  13;   to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Editors,  hints  to,  pp.  101-4. 
Educational    organizations    and    institu- 
tions, capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

E.g.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

"Elect,"  sufB.xed  to  titles,  201. 

Ellipses:  rules  for  use  of,  180-81;  to  be 
treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88,  181; 
use  of,  to  indicate  omissions,  180. 

Em,  defined,  258. 

Em-dash:    defined,  258;    illustrated,  263; 

use  of,  for    "to"    in   time  indications, 

173- 
Emphasis:    use   of   dashes   for,    168;     of 

exclamation  points,  127;    of  italics,  58. 

Em-quad,  defined,  258;    illustrated,  263. 

I^n-dash:  defined,  260;  illustrated,  263; 
use  of,  instead  of  hyphen,  in  compounds, 
183;  for  "to"  connecting  two  words  or 
figures,    173. 

English:  equivalent  of  foreign  word  or 
phrase,  to  be  quoted,  78;  system  of 
division,  221;  titles  of  publications,  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

En-quad:    defined,  260;    illustrated,  263. 

Enumerations,  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with  letters  or  figures  used  to 
indicate  subdivisions  in,  176. 

Epigrammatic  turn,  use  of  dash  to  indi- 
cate, 166. 

Epithets,  capitalized,  when  used  as  proper 
names,  2. 

Epochs,  historical  and  geological,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  14. 

rCquivalcnt,  English,  of  word  or  phrase 
from  foreign  language,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  78. 

Essays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;    to  be  italicized,  60. 

Etc.:  use  of  comma  before,  143;  when 
to  be  treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88. 

Etymology,  division  according  to  (Eng- 
lish system),  221. 

eu,  form  of  indefinite  article  before,   114. 

Even  spacing,  importance  of,  265. 


Events,  important  historical,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  15. 

"Ex-,"  prefixed  to  titles,  201. 

Exclamation  point,  rules  for  use  of,  127- 
28. 

Exclamatory  "Oh,"  117. 

Explanation:    of  technical  terms,  251-94; 

use  of  brackets  for,  178. 
Expositions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 
"Extra,"  compounds  with,  209. 
Extracts,  rules  for  punctuation  of,  112. 

F.,  S.    (  =  "following"):    spacing   of,  269; 

use  of,   110. 
Face,  defined,  256. 

"Farther"  and  "further,"  differentiation 
of,  116. 

"Father":  compounds  of,  190;  when 
capitalized,  27. 

Feast-days,  capitalization  of  names  of,  20. 

"Fellow,"  compounds  of,  189. 

Figures:  columns  of,  in  tables,  244;  rules 
for  use  of,  94-98. 

Figures  (illustrations)  in  text,  letters  re- 
ferring to,  68. 

Firms,  names  of  commercial:  abbrevia- 
tion of,  107;    capitalization  of,  11. 

First  words:  after  a  colon,  when  capital- 
ized, 35;  following  "Whereas"  and 
"Re.solved"  in  resolutions,  capitali- 
zation of,  39;  in  sections  of  enumera- 
tion, when  capitalized,  36;  in  titles  of 
publications,  capitalization  of,  41;  of 
citations,  when  capitalized,  38  (cf.  131); 
of  lines  of  poetry,  capitalization  of,  34; 
of  quotations,  when  lower-case  is  used 
for,  57  (cf.  131);  of  sentences,  capitali- 
zation of,  34. 

Five-em  space,  defined,  262. 
"Flush,"  defined,   280. 
"Fold,"  combinations  with,   199. 
Folio,  defined,  291. 
Font,  defined,  257. 

Footnotes:  exceptions  to  general  style 
for,  236,  238.  note;  general  style  for,  23O; 
indices  for  references  to,  231;  number 
ing  of,  238;  rules  for,  231-38;  samples 
of,  236;    to  tables,   233. 

Foreign  institutions  and  organizations, 
capitalization  of  titles  of,  11. 

Foreign  languages:  English  translation 
accompanying  word,  phrase,  or  passage 
cited  from,  to  be  quoted,  78;  sentences 
and  pa.ssages  quoted  from,  how  to  treat, 


I20 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


59,  8s;  words  and  phrases  from,  use  of 
italics  for,  59;  words  and  phrases  bor- 
rowed from,  incorporated  into  English, 
how  to  treat,  59. 

Foreign  titles  of  publications,  capitaliza- 
tion of,  42. 

"Format"  of  books  (4to,  Svo,  etc.),  not 
to  be  treated  as  abbreviations,  123. 

Formulae,  spacing  of,  273. 

"Fort,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 

"Foster,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Foul  proof,  defined,  288. 

Foundry-proof,  defined,  287. 

Four-em  space,  defined,  262. 

Fractions,  use  of  hyphen  in,  2 10. 

French:  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42;  use  of  ligatures  a  or  ain,  115. 
'Further"  and  "farther,"  differentiation 
of,  116. 

G,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Galley,  defined,  285. 

Galley-proof,  defined,  285. 

"General,"  combined  with  title,   201. 

Geographical  names,  capitalization  of,  4,  6. 

Geological  terms,  capitalization  of,  14,  46. 

Geometry,  letters  used  to  designate  lines, 
etc.,  in,  67. 

German  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42. 

Given  names.     See  Christian  names. 

"God,"  compounds  of,  195. 

Governmental  departments,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  12. 

Grain,  abbre\ialion  for,  iii. 

Gram,  abbreviation  for,  iii. 

"Great,"  compounds  of,  191. 

H,  form  of  indefinite  article  before  sounded, 
114. 

Hair-space,  defined,  263. 

Hair-spacing,  tabooed,  266. 

"Half,"  combinations  of,  with  nouns,  196. 

Half-title,  defined,  292. 

Hanging  indention:  defined  and  illus- 
trated, 279,  284;   indention  in,  274. 

Headings,   described,   279-83. 

Headlines:  of  tables,  how  to  set,  240; 
omission  of  period  after,  125;  spacing 
of,  271;  word  "continued"  following 
to  be  set  in  italics,  73. 


Heads.     See  Headings,  Headlines. 

Historical:  epochs,  capitalization  of  appel- 
lations for,  14;  events,  capitalization  of, 
15;  terms  of  special  significance,  capi- 
talization of.  16. 

Holidays.     See  Feast-days. 

Honorary  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

"House,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Hyphen  leader,  defined,  243. 

Hyphenated  words:  division  of,  to  be 
avoided,  225;    list  of,  214. 

Hyphenization,  rules  for,  182-214. 

Hyphens:  number  of  consecutive,  allow- 
able at  ends  of  lines,  217;  rules  for  use 
of,   182-214. 

Ibid.,  use  of,  232. 

Ideas,  abstract,  capitalization  of,  when 
personified,    26. 

I.e.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

If-clauses,  use  of  'Comma  in  connection 
with,  144. 

Illustrations,  letters  referring  to  parts  of, 
68. 

Implication  of  word  or  phrase,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  171. 

Importance,  use  of  italics  for,  58. 

"In-"     (negative     particle),     compounds 

with,    205. 
Indentation.     See  Indention. 
Indention:     explained,    274;     rules    for, 

274-76. 
Indexing:   italicizing  of  "5et;,"  ''See  also" 

in  cross-references,  62;    rules  for,  239; 

treatment  of   prefixes  and  particles  in 

proper  nouns,  239. 
Indices  for  footnote  references:    how  to 

number,  238;   placing  of,  235;  sequence 

of,  231;   what  to  use  for,  231. 

Industrial  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  11. 

"Infra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

Initials:    of  titles  of  publications,  use  of. 

123;   separation  of,  in  different  lines,  to 

be  avoided,  219. 
Institutions:    capitalization  of  names  of, 

11;    use  of  roman  type  for  foreign,  59- 

"Inter,"  compounds  with,  208. 
Interpolations,  use  of  brackets  for,    178. 
Interrogation  point,  use  of,  129-30. 
"Intra,"  compounds  with,  208. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


121 


Ironical  word  or  phrase:  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77;  use  of  exclamation 
point  for,  127. 

■ise  and  -ize,  differentiation  between,  as 
terminations,   120. 

Italian  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  4>. 

Italics:  defined,  254;  how  indicated,  254; 
rules  for  use  of,  58-73. 

Italicizing:  of  address  lines,  64;  of  astro- 
nomical names,  71;  of  letters  designating 
unknown  quantities,  67;  of  letters  refer- 
ring to  letters  in  illustrations,  68;  of 
names  of  genera  and  species,  71;  of 
initial  word.  Resolved,  72;  of  symbols 
indicating  subdivisions,  66;  of  symbols 
for  shillings  and  pence,  70;  of  titles  or 
position  after  signatures,  65;  of  titles 
of  books  and  other  works,  60;  of  titles 
of  legal  causes  and  proceedings,  63;  of 
words  "See''  and  "See  also"  in  cross- 
references  in  indexing,  62 ;  of  words  and 
phrases  to  which  emphasis  is  to  be  given, 
58;  of  words  and  phrases  from  foreign 
languages,  sq;  of  words  used  in  literary 
references,  61;  of  words  representing 
continuation  of  article  or  chapter,  73. 

I,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Journals.     See   Periodicals. 

Judiciary  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 

of,   12. 
Juridical  acts,  laws,  bills,  capitalization  of 

names  of,  18. 
"Justification,"  defined,  264. 

'Kaiser,"  when  capitalized,  21. 
Kern,  defined,  256. 

Lanston.     See   Monotype. 
Last  words,  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,    41. 

Latin:  non-use  of  ligature  a:  and  a"  in, 
115;  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in.  42. 

Laws,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  18. 

"Leaded,"  defined,  277. 

Leaders,  definition  and  use  of,  243. 

Leads:   defined,  277;   use  of,  278. 

Lectures,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Legends,  omission  of  period  after,  125. 

Legislative  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  12. 


Letters:  in  text  or  legends  referring  to 
corresponding  letter  in  accompanying 
illustrations  (diagrams),  68;  references 
to  particular,  to  be  set  in  italics,  69. 

"Lieutenant,"  combined  with  other  title 
201. 

"Life,"  compounds  of,  1Q2. 

Ligature  <r  and  a',  use  of,  1x5. 

"Like,"  adjectives  ending  in,  200. 

Linguistic  periods:  abbreviation  of  names 
for,  123;    capitalization  of,  14. 

Linotype  machine  (Mergenthaler)  :  de- 
scribed, 293;  how  to  number  footnotes 
in  matter  set  on,  238;  use  of  leaders  in 
tables  set  on,  243. 

List:  of  hyphenated  words,  214;  of  words 
of  more  than  one  spelling,  119. 

Literary  references:  abbreviations  in,  107; 
list  of  phrases  and  abbreviations  used 
in,  61. 

Literary  schools,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

Loc.  cil..  use  of,  232. 

Long  primer,  explained,  252. 

Lower-case:  defined,  257;  rules  for  use 
of,  53-57. 

Machines,    type-setting,    different    styles 

of,  293-94. 
Magazines.     See  Periodicals. 
"Maker,"  compounds  of,  187. 
Make-up,  defined,  290. 
"Manuscript,"  abbreviation  for,   44,  123. 
Manuscripts,  titles  of:   to  be  set  in  roman, 

60;   use  of  capitals  in,  44. 
"Master,"  compounds  of,  194. 
Mathematical  signs,  spacing  of,  273. 
Mea.surement,  units  of,  spelled  with  lower- 
case initial  letter,  55. 
Measures,  metric,  how  to  designate,  in. 
Medical  terms,  capitalization  of,  46. 
"Mc,"  "Mac,"  "  M',"  rule  for  treatment 

of,  239. 
Mergenthaler.     See  Linotype. 
Metric:  symbols,  how  to  treat,  T23;spacing 

of,  269;    .system,  designation  of  weights 

and  measures  in,  in. 
Military  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 
"Mill,"  compounds  of,  186. 
Minion,  explained,  252. 
Miscellaneous  terms,  capitalization  of,  33. 
Monastic   orders,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  10. 


122  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Monetary  symbols,  spacing  of,  270. 
Money,  sums  of,  how  to  treat,  97. 
Monotype  machine  (Lanston),  described, 

294- 
Months,   names   of,   when   to   be   spelled 

out,  102. 
"Mother,"  compounds  of,  190. 
Mottoes:   capitalization  of  principal  words 

in,  41;   to  be  roman-quoted,  82. 
"Mount,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 
Movements,    historical,   capitalization    of 

names  of,   16. 

"Namely,"   use   of    colon    in    connection 

with,  132. 

Names:  alphabetization  of,  239;  Christian, 

to  be  spelled  out,  93;   familiar,  applied 

to  particular  persons,  to  be  capitalized, 

21;   proper,  capitalization  of,  i. 

Nature,  personified,  capitalization  of,  26. 

Negative    particles     "un-,"     "in,"     and 

"a-,"  compounds  with,  205. 
Newspapers,  titles  of:  the  article  not  to  be 
treated  as  part  of,  43;   capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;   to  be  italicized, 
60. 
New  Testament  books,  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  109. 
Nobility,  capitalization  of  titles  of,  21. 
"Non-,"  compounds  with,   205. 
Nonpareil,  explained,  252. 
"Nor,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  143. 
"Not,"   use   of   comma   before,    in   anti- 
thetical clauses,  149. 
"Note"  introducing  note  not  a  footnote, 

use  of  cap  and  small  caps  for,  51. 
"Nothing,"  not  to  be  divided,  230. 
Nouns:    capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 41;    combination  of,  standing 
in  objective  relation  to  each  other,  184; 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  formation  of  plural 
of,  1O5;    followed  by  numeral,  capitali- 
zation  of,   37   (cf.    110);    proper,   capi- 
talization of,  I  (cf.  5,  53). 
Numbered   political  divisions,   capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  7. 
Numbers:    commencing  a  sentence,  to  be 
spelled  out,  96;    consecutive,  treatment 
of,  159,  173;    in  connected  groups  to  be 
treated  alike,  94;    in  groups  of  six  or 
more   closely    connected,    to   be   set    in 
figures,  94;    of  less  than  three  digits,  to 
be  spelled  out  in  ordinary  reading-matter, 
94;    round,   treatment   of,   95;    use  of 


comma  after  digits  indicating  thousands, 
159;  use  of  comma  to  separate,  154; 
use  of  dash  for  "to"  connecting,  173- 
Numerals:  Arabic,  at  beginning  of  lines, 
spacing  of,  271;  Roman,  at  beginning 
of  lines  and  in  headlines,  spacing  ot, 
271;  omission  of  period  after,  124. 

"O"    and    "Oh":    capitalization     of,    40; 

differentiation  in  use  of,  117. 
"O,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  239. 
Occupations,   compounds    denoting,    187. 
(F,  rules  for  use  of,  115. 
Offices,  capitalization  of  names  of,  12,  21. 
Officers:    titles  of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21; 
of   University  of   Chicago,  to  be  capi- 
talized,  49. 
Old  Testament  books,  list  of  abbreviations 

for,  109. 
Omission:  of  comma  after  signatures, 
etc.,  161;  of  figures  in  numbers  or  letters 
in  middle  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
for,  163;  of  period  after  headlines,  etc., 
125;  after  Roman  numerals,  124;  of  s, 
d,  and  //;  in  dates,  102 ;  of  word  or  words, 
indicated  by  comma,  15s;  use  of  brack- 
ets for,  178;  of  ellipsis,  180. 
"One,"  "once,"  etc.,   form   of    indefinite 

article  before,  ii4- 
Op.  cit.,  use  of,  232. 
Open  tables:    headlines  for,  241;    how  to 

set,  240;   specimen  of,  230. 
"Or,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  143. 
Orders     (decorations),     capitalization    of 

names  of,  21. 
Orders,  monastic,  capitalization  of  names 

of,   10. 
Ordinals:     when    capitalized,    13;     when 

not,  45. 
Organizations,  capitalization  of  names  of, 

II. 
Outcry,  use  of  exclamation  lt)int  after,  127. 
"Over,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Pages,  etc.,  use  of  comma  between  con- 
secutive, 159;    of  dash,  173. 

Page-proof,  defined,  286. 

Pamphlets,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized, 
60. 

Papers  (addresses),  titles  of:  capitaliza- 
tion of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,   82. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


123 


Parables,  biblical,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  32- 
Paragraph  mark:   spacing  of,  269;   use  of, 

for  footnote  index,  231. 
Paragraphs:   explained,  284;   first  lines  of , 
in  quoted   prose  matter  to  begin  with 
quotation  marks,  89;   indention  of,  274; 
styles  of,  276  (cf.  284). 
Parallel  mark,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 

231- 
"Parent,"  compounds  of,  190. 
Parentheses:     rules   for   use   of,    176-77; 
use   of,   for   parenthetical   clauses,    177 
(cf.  ISO,  167);  in  connection  with  figures 
or  letters  indicating  subsections,  176. 
Parenthesis:    placing  of  period  in  connec- 
tion with,  126;    within  parentheses,  use 
of  brackets  for,  178. 
Parenthetical  clauses:    use  of  commas  in 
connection  with,   150;    of  dashes,   167, 
169;   of  parentheses,  177  (cf-  150.  167). 
Parks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 
Participial  clauses,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  148. 
Participle:    omission  or  retention  of  final 
e  in  original  word,  when,  118;    present, 
united  with  noun,  or  with  preposition, 
185. 
Particles,  in  French.  Dutch,  and  German 

names,  capitalization  of,  3. 
Parties,  political,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  9. 
Parts  (of  books,  etc.),  titles  of:    capitali- 
zation of  principal  words  in,  41;    to  be 
roman-quoted,   82. 
Pause,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 
Pearl,  explained,  252. 
Pence.     See  Shillings. 
Peoples,  races,  and  tribes,  capitalization 

of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 
Per  cent:    to  be  followed  by  figures,  04", 
not   to   be   treated   as  an  abbreviation, 

123- 

Period:  placing  of,  in  connection  with 
quotation  marks,  126;  rules  for  use 
of,  122-26;  to  be  omitted  after  abbre- 
viations for  linguistic  eix)chs,  123;  after 
headlines,  125;  after  initials  of  titles  of 
publications,  123;  after  MS  (  =  manu- 
script),  123;  use  of,  after  abbreviations, 
123;  at  end  of  sentence,  122  (cf.  125); 
in  classical  references,  236,  238,  note. 

Period  leader,  defined,  243. 

Periodicals,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;    definite  article  not 


to    be    treated    as    part    of.  43;    to  be 

italicized,  60. 
Periods,   geological,   historical,   linguistic, 

and  literary,  capitalization  of  names  of, 

14. 
Personifications,    capitalization    of,    26. 

Philosophical  schools,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  9. 

Phrases:  adjectival,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  1S2;  conjunctional,  etc., 
145- 

Pica,  explained,  252. 

Place  of  publication  and  publisher's  name, 
use  of  colon  between,  135. 

Place-names,  foreign,  how  to  treat.  59. 

Plain  paragraph:   defined  and  illustrated, 

284;  indention  of,  274. 
Plate-proof,  defined,  287. 
Plays,  titles  of:   capitalization  of  principal 

w'ordsin,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Plurals:  formation  of,  165;  of  abbrevia- 
tions in  literary  references,  how  formed, 
no;  of  nouns,  not  divisible  if  singulars 
are  not,  228;  of  numerals,  formation 
of,  165. 

P.M.  (post  meridiem):  spacing  of,  52,  219; 
use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 

Poems:  capitalization  of  first  word  of  each 
line  in  English,  34;  of  first  word  of  each 
paragraph  in  Greek  and  Latin,  34;  of 
principal  words  in  titles  of.  41;  titles 
of  shorter,  to  be  roman  quoted,  81 
(cf.  60);  titles  of,  when  set  in  italics 
and  when  in  roman,  60. 

Poetrv:  indention  of.  275;  quotations  from. 
when  to  reduce,  85;  when  to  run  into 
the  text,  85. 

Point  system,  explanation  of,  251-52. 

Political:  alliances,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  16;  divisions,  6-7;  organizations,  j  1 ; 
parties,  9. 

"Pope,"  when  capitalized,  21. 

Position,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Possessive  case,  how  formed,   113,  164. 

"Post,"  compounds  with,  208. 

"Pre,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Preface,  etc.,  quotation  marks  to  be  omit- 
ted with,  82. 

Prefix  or  suffix  not  complete  in  itself,  to 
be  indicated  by  hyphen.  212. 

Prefixes  "co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re,"  how 
to  treat,  203. 


124         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Prepositions:  formation  of  nouns  of  pres- 
ent participles  in  connection  with,  185; 
to  be  lower-cased  in  titles,  41;  use  of 
comma  in  connection  with  clauses  end- 
ing in  different,  153. 

"President,"  when  capitalized,  21,  49. 

Principal  words:  capitalization  of,  in 
titles  of  publications,  41;  definition  of, 
41. 

Proceedings  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41;  to 
be  italicized,  60. 

Pronouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;   referring  to  Deity,  24. 

Pronunciation,  division  according  to 
(American   system),   221. 

Proofreaders:    hints  to,  pp.  105-7;    marks 

of,  p.    HI. 

Proofs,  description  of,  285-89. 

Proper  names:  capitalization  of,  i;  how 
to  form  possessive  of,  113;  verbs  and 
adjectives  derived  from,  use  of  lower- 
case for,  53. 

Proper  nouns:  capitalization  of,  i,  5,  53; 
division  of,  to  be  avoided,  218. 

Prose:  extracts,  when  to  reduce,  85; 
when  to  run  into  text,  85;  indention 
of  paragraphs  in,  274. 

Publications:  period  to  be  omitted  after 
initials  used  as  abbreviations  for,  123; 
titles  of,  capitalization  of  principal 
words  in,  41;  titles  of  subdivisions  of, 
when  to  be  roman-quoted,  82;  use  of 
italics  for,  60;  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
105. 

Punctuation:  of  extracts  from  modern 
authors,   112;    rules  for,   121-214. 

Punctuation  marks:  placing  of,  with  refer- 
ence to  indices  in  text,  231;  to  be 
printed  in  same  type  as  word  or  letter 
preceding  them,   121. 

"Pyramid,"  explained  and  illustrated, 
279. 

Quad,  defined,  258. 

Quadrat.     See  Quad. 

"Quarter,"  compounds  of,  196. 

4to,  8vo,  etc.,  not  to  be  treated  as  abbre- 
viations, 123. 

"Quasi,"  compounds  with,  206. 

Query,  use  of  interrogation  point  for,  129. 

Question  mark.     See  Interrogation  point. 

Questions:  direct,  to  be  followed  by  inter- 
rogation point.  129;  indirect,  not  to 
be  followed  by  interrogation  point,  129. 


Quotation  marks:  not  to  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  reduced  citations,  87; 
placing  of  colon  in  connection  with, 
136;  of  comma,  162;  of  ellipsis,  181; 
of  exclamation  point,  128;  of  interro- 
gation point,  130;  of  period,  126;  rules 
for  use  of,  74-91;  to  be  omitted  in 
references  to  Preface,  Index,  etc.,  82; 
use  of  double  and  single,  gi. 

Quotations,  how  to  treat,  74-91. 

Races,  tribes,  and  peoples,  capitalization 

of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 
"Railroad"  and  "Railway,"  to  be  spelled 

out,  104. 
"Re-,"  compounds  with,  203. 
Reading-matter  in  columns  of  ruled  tables, 

how  to  set,  245. 

Recto,  defined,  283. 

Reductions:  rules  for,  85-87;   scale  of,  86. 

Reference  indices,  what  to  use  for,   231. 

References,  literary:  list  of  words  to  be 
abbreviated  in,  no  (cf.  37,  236);  punc- 
tuation of,  etc.,  236,  238,  note;  use  of 
dash  in  connection  with,  174. 

"Reformer,"  when  capitalized,  27. 

Regiments,  capitalization  of  names  of,  13. 

Regions  or  parts  of  the  world,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  5. 

Regular  paragraph.     See  Plain  paragraph. 

Religious:  denominations,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  9;    organizations,  11. 

Residence,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Resolutions:  how  to  introduce  para- 
graphs in,  39,  51,  72;  word  "Resolved" 
in,  how  to  set,  72;  word  "Whereas," 
51- 

"Resolved,"  in  resolutions,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  72. 

Revise,  defined,.  289. 

Rhymed  lines,  in  poetry,  indention  of, 
2  75- 

Roman  numerals:  at  beginning  of  lines, 
spacing  of,  271;  in  headlines,  spacing 
of,  271;    omission  of  period  after,   124. 

"Roman-quote,"  defined,  74,  253. 

Roman  type,  defined,   253. 

"Room,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Round  numbers,  definition  and  treatment 

of,    95- 
Ruled   tables:    box-heads  for,   241;    how 

to    set.    240;     reading-matter    in,    245; 

specimens  of,   250. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


125 


I 


Rules:     double,    use   of,    in   tables,    247; 

]^les  for  use  of,  in  tables,  242. 
"Run  in,"  defined,  280. 
Running-heads:    defined,    283;     omission 

of  period  after,  125;   hint  for  setting  of, 

283. 
Run-overs,  avoidance  of,  266. 

Sacred    books,    capitalization    of    names 

of,  2g. 
"Saint":     to    be    omitted    in    connection 
with  names  of  apostles,  church  fathers 
etc.,  108;    when  abbreviated,  108. 

Salutatory  phrase  at  beginning  of  letters, 
rules  for  setting,  50. 

Schools,  philosophical,  literary,  and  artis- 
tic, capitalization  of  names  of,  9. 

Scientific  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  46. 

Scripture  passages:  names  of  books  of 
Bible  to  be  abbreviated  in,  109;  punc- 
tuation of,   134,   139;    spacing  of,  272. 

"Section,"  introducing  paragraphs  and 
followed  by  a  number,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Section  mark:  spacing  of,  269;  use  of, 
for  footnote  index,  231. 

Sects,  religious,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
9- 

"Self,"  compounds  of,  198. 

"Semi,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Semicolon:  illustration  of  use  of,  com- 
pared with  that  of  comma,  137;  placing 
of,  in  connection  with  quotation  marks, 
140;  rules  for  use  of,  137-40;  use  of, 
in  enumerations,  138;  to  mark  division 
of  sentence,  137;  to  separate  passages 
in  Scripture  references  containing  chap- 
ters, 139. 

Sequences:  of  footnote  indices,  231;  of 
subdivisional  numberings,  176;  of  three 
or  more  links,  use  of  comma  before 
"and,"  "or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 

Serial  titles:   to  be  roman  quoted,  80. 

Series,  use  of  comma  before  final  "and," 
"or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 

Sermons,  titles  of,  to  be  ronian  quoted, 
82. 

Shank,  defined,  256. 

Shillings  and  pence,  how  to  treat  abbre- 
viations for,  70. 

Ships,  names  of,  to  be  roman  quoted,  83. 

"Shop,"  compounds  of,  i86. 

"Short  and":  definition  of,  107;  when 
used,  104,  107. 


Short  words:  avoidance  of  divisions  of, 
216;    spacing  of,  268. 

Shoulder,    defined,    256. 

Side-heads;  defined,  280;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;  use  of  dash  in  con- 
nection with,  172;  use  of  lower-case 
in,  56  (cf.  172). 

Signatures  at  end  of  letters  or  articles: 
omission  of  comma  after,  161;  of  period, 
125;  rules  for  setting  of,  50,  65. 

"Sister,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Sizes  of  type,    in   ordinary  use,   samples 

of,  252. 
"Skin,"  compounds  of,  193. 
Slug,  defined,  278. 
Small  caps:   defined,  257;   how  indicated, 

257;    use  of,  52. 
Small  pica,  explained,  252. 
Social     organizations,     capitalization     of 

names  of,  11. 
Soft  c  or  g,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 
Solar  system,  capitalization  of  names  of 

bodies  in,  in  works  on  astronomy,  48. 

"Solid,"  defined,  297. 

Spaces:  different  sizes  of,  explained,  258- 
63;  specimen  of  lines  spaced  with  differ- 
ent sizes  of,  263. 

Spacing:  of  divisional  signs,  269;  of  figure 
columns  in  tables,  244;  of  formulae, 
273;  of  headlines,  271;  of  metric  sym- 
bols, 269;  of  monetary  symbols,  270;  of 
numerals  at  beginning  of  paragraphs, 
271;  of  reading-matter  in  ruled  tables, 
245;  of  rules  in  tables,  242;  of  Scrip- 
ture passages,  272;  of  short  words,  268; 
rules  for,  258-73;  standard,  264;  what 
is  considered  good,  264;  with  different 
sizes  of  spaces,  samples  of,  263. 

Spanish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42. 

Species,  scientific  names  of:  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  46;   of  italics,  46. 

Specimen  tables,  250. 

Spelled  out,  words,  phrases,  and  titles 
which  are  to  be,  92-105. 

Spelling:  list  of  words  of  more  than  one, 
119;  of  ages,  99;  of  books  of  Bible,  100; 
of  centuries,  100;  of  Christian  names. 
93;  of  "Company"  and  "Brothers" 
in  names  of  firms,  107;  of  decades,  loi; 
of  Egyptian  dynasties.  100;  of  extracts 
from  modern  authors,  112;  from  ( )ld 
English,  112;  of  indefinite  article  before 
h,  u,  etc.,  114;  of  metric  symbols,  1 1 1 ;  of 
names  of  months,  102;  of  names  of  pub- 


126 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


lications,  105;  of  names  of  regiments, 
100;  of  numbers  commencing  a  sentence, 
96;  of  numbers  of  less  than  three  digits, 
94;  of  possessives  of  proper  names 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  113;  of  "Railroad" 
and  "Railway,"  104;  of  round  numbers, 
95;  of  "Saint,"  108;  of  sessions  of 
Congress,  100;  of  states  and  territories, 
106;  of  sums  of  money,  97;  of  time  of 
day,  98;  of  titles,  92;  of  "United  States," 
103;  of  words  denoting  subsections,  in 
literary  references,   no;    rules  for,  92- 

I  JO. 

Squares,    capitalization    of   names   of,    8. 

Standard:  of  measurement  in  typog- 
raphy, 252;  space  used  to  separate 
words,   261. 

"State,"  when  capitalized,  28,  note. 

States  and  territories,  names  of:  list  of 
abbreviations  for,  106;  to  be  abbreviated 
when  following  those  of  towns,  106. 

Statistics,   treatment   of   numbers   in,    94. 

"Store,"  compounds  of,   188. 

Stub:    definition  of,  241;    head  for,  241. 

Styles  of  type,  253-^7. 

"Sub,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Subdivisions:  in  literary  references,  use 
of  lower-case  for,  54  (cf.  no,  236); 
letters  used  to  indicate,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  66;  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with,  66;  of  publications,  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in  titles  of, 
41;  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  or 
capitalized  without  quotation  marks,  82. 

Sufifix  or  prefix,  indicated  by  hyphen,  212. 

"Sultan,"   when    capitalized,    21. 

Summarizing    clauses,    use   of    dashes    in 

connection  with,  170. 
"Super,"  compounds  with,  208. 
Superior    figures,    use    of,    for    reference 

indices,  231,  238. 
Superscriptions,  omission  of  period  after, 

125- 

"Supra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

Supreme  Being,  capitalization  of  names 
for,  and  pronouns  referring  to,  24. 

Swedish  titles  of  publications,  use  of 
capitals  in,  42. 

Syllabi,  scheme  of  notation  and  inden- 
tion of  subdivisions  in,  176. 

Syllables,   hyphen  used   to   indicate,    213. 

Symbols:  chemical,  treatment  of,  123; 
metric,  spacing  of,  269;  treatment  of, 
III,  123;  monetary,  spacing  of,  270; 
of  measurement,  abbreviation  of,   iii. 


Tables:  headlines  of,  how  to  set,  249; 
of  two  columns,  to  be  set  as  open,  248; 
of  more  than  two,  as  ruled,  248;  open, 
headlines  for  columns  in,  241;  open, 
how  to  set,  240;  ruled,  box-heads  for, 
241;  ruled,  how  to  set,  240;  rules  for 
setting  of,  240-50;  rules  for  use  of 
rules  in,  242,  247;  specimen,  250;  to 
be  set  to  even  picas  or  nonpareils,  246.        j 

Tabular  work,  rules  for,  240-50  (see 
Tables). 

Technical:  terms,  explanation  of  typo- 
graphical, 251-94;  words  or  phrases, 
use  of  quotation  marks  for,  77. 

"The"  not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of 
newspapers  or  magazines,  43. 

Thick  space,  defined,  261. 

Thin  space,  defined,  262. 

Thin-spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265 

Thoroughfares:  capitalization  of  names 
of,  8;  numbers  forming  part  of  names 
of,  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Thousands,  use  of  comma  after  digits 
indicating,   159. 

Three-em  dash:  defined,  259;  illustrated, 
263. 

Three-em  quad,  defined,  259. 

Three-em  space,  defined,  261. 

Time:  indications,  how  to  punctuate,  134 
of  day,  how  to  treat,  98. 

Titles:  civil  and  military,  capitalization 
of,  21;  honorary,  21;  in  direct  address, 
21;  of  nobility,  21;  preceding  names, 
to  be  spelled  out,  92;  list  of  exceptions, 
92:  "vice."  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,," 
and  "lieutenant,"  constituting  parts  of, 
how  to  treat,  201. 

Titles  of  legal  causes  and  proceedings, 
italicized,     63. 

Titles  of  publications:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  use  of  capitals 
in:  English,  Latin,  French,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Swedish,  German,  Danish, 
Dutch,  42;  use  of  italics  for,  60;  of 
roman  quoted.  80,  81,  82;  to  be 
correctly  quoted,  112;  whei\  to  be 
spelled  out,  105;  of  addresses,  82;  of 
articles,  82:  of  books,  60;  of  chapters, 
82;  of  cycles  of  poems,  60;  of  di- 
visions of  books,  etc.,  82;  of  docu- 
ments, 60;  of  essays,  60;  of  lectures, 
82;  of  newspapers,  60;  of  pamphlets, 
60;  of  papers,  82;  of  periodicals,  60; 
of  plays,  60;  of  poems,  printed  in  sepa- 
rate volume,  60;  of  poems,  short, 
81  (cf.  60);  of  proceedings  of  societies, 
60;     of    series,    80;     of    tracts,    52;    of 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


127 


transactions  of  societies,  60;  of  treatises, 
60. 

Toasts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  ronian-quoted, 
82. 

"To  be  continued,"  at  end  of  articles,  how 
to  set,  73. 

Town  and  state,  names  of,  in  date  line, 
how  to  set,  so. 

Tracts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;   to  be  italicized,  60. 

Transactions  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41; 
to  be  italicized,  60. 

Transition,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 

Translation:  of  names  of  foreign  institu- 
tions, 11,59;  of  foreign  words  or  phrases, 
78. 

Treaties,  capitalization  of  names  of,   18. 

Treatises,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;    to  be  italicized,  60. 

"Tri-"  compounds  with,  197. 

Tribes,  races,  and  peoples,  capitalization 
of  names  and  epithets  of,  47. 

Trinity,  Christian,  capitalization  of  names 
of  members  of,  24. 

Two-column  tables,  to  be  set  as  open,  248. 

Two-em  dash:  defined,  259;  illustrated, 
263. 

Two-em  quad,  defined,  259. 

Two-letter  syllables,  avoidance  of,  in 
divisions,    216. 

Type:  different  parts  of  body  of,  ex- 
plained, 256;  names  for  different  sizes 
of,  252;    styles  of,  253-57. 

Typesetting  machines,  293-94. 

Typographical  terms,  explanation  of, 
251-94. 

U,  long,  form  of  indefinite  article  before, 
114. 

"Ultra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

"Un-"  compounds  with,  205.  _ 

"Under,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Unit,  typographical,  explained,  251. 

Units  of  measurement,  spelled  with  lower- 
case initial  letter,  55. 


"United  States":  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
103;   when  to  be  abbreviated,  103. 

University  of  Chicago:  capitalization  of 
special  terms  dealing  with  organization, 
administration,  and  curricula  of,  49; 
of  titles  of  divisions,  departments,  offi- 
cers, and  courses  and  units  of  study,  in 
official  work  deaUng  with,  49. 

Unusual  word  or  phrase,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77. 

"Van,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  239. 
Verbs:    capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications,    41;      derived     from     proper 

names,  how  to  treat,  53. 
Verse  or  page,  letter  affixed  to  number  of, 

to  denote  fractional  part:    to  be  set  in 

italic,  66;    spacing  of,  66. 
Versions  of  Bible:    abbreviations  for,  30; 

capitalization  of,  30. 
Verso,  defined,  283. 
Versus  (v.),  59. 

"Vice,"  prefixed  to  titles,  how  to  treat,  201. 
Vocative,  "O,"  117. 
"Vol.,"   "chap.,"   "p.,"    etc.,    in    literary 

references:    use  of  numerals  with,  236; 

when  omitted,  236. 
"Von,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  239. 
Vowel:   divide  on,  whenever  possible,  224; 

single,     forming     separate     syllable     in 

middle  of  word,  to  be  put  in  first  line 

in  dividing,  224.    ■ 

Weights  and  measures,  metric:  how  to 
designate,  111;   spacing  of ,  269. 

"Wliereas,"  in  resolutions,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Wide  spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265. 

Word  or  phrase:  accompanied  by  its  dcli- 
nition,  to  be  quoted,  76;  to  which 
attention  is  directed,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  79. 

Words:  hyphenated,  list  of,  214;  of  more 
than  one  spelling,  how  to  spell,  119. 

"Work,"  compounds  of,  186. 

"World,"  compounds  of,  192. 

Zoological  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  71. 


I 


INDEX  TO  TYPES 


PAGE 

Advertising  Figures 85 

Antique  Greek 43 

Arabic 44 

Black  Gothic 81 

Black  No.  13 91 

Body  Type: 

Modern 3-7 

Old  Style 8-16 

Monotype 17-26 

Linotype 27-31 

Bold-Face  Italic 67 

Bookman  Old  Style 38-41 

Borders 113-11S 

Bradley  Text 90 

Brass  Circles 92 

Caslon  Old  Style 32-35.  46"47 

Caslon  Old  Style  Italic 47 

Century  Expanded 72 

Cheltenham  Old  Style 54 

Cheltenham  Old  Style  Italic 54-55 

Cheltenham  Bold. . .  ■. 58-60 

Cheltenham  Bold  Italic 61-62 

Cheltenham  Wide 56-57 

Clarendon 62 

Condensed  De  Vinne 78 

Condensed  Old  Style 50-51 

Condensed  Title 87 

Copperplate 81 

Gushing  Old  Style 68-69 

Delia  Robbia 63-64 

De  Vinne 74-77 

De  Vinne  Condensed 78 

Elzevir  Italic 49 

Enghsh 91 

Engraver's  Bold 71 

Engraver's  Old  English 8g 

Ethiopic 44 

Extended  Old  Style Si 

French  Old  Style 52-53 

Gothic  Condensed 80 


PAGE 

Greek: 

Porson 42 

Antique 43 

Inscription 43 

Hebrew 43 

Initials 93-101 

Inscription  Greek 43 

Interchangeable  Gothic 84 

Ionic 62 

Jenson  Old  Style 6s 

Jenson  Old  Style  Italic 66-67 

Light  Face  Gothic 80 

Lining  Gothic  Condensed 82-83 

Linotype 27-31 

Litho  Roman 86 

Masonic  Emblems 102-103 

Miscellaneous  Signs 45 

Modern 3-7 

Monarch 83 

Monotype 17-26 

Nestorian  Syriac 44 

New  Model  Remington  Typewriter 88 

Old  Style  Antique 67 

Old  Style 8-16 

Old  Style  No.  8 -...48 

Old  Style  Italic  No.  8 49 

Ornaments 104-112 

Pontiac 7o~7i 

•  Porson  Greek 42 

Post  Old  Style 73 

Priory  Text 91 

Remington  Typewriter 88 

Remington  Typewriter  New  Model 88 

Scotch  Roman 36-37 

Sloping  Gothic 85 

Syriac,  Nestorian 44 

Title 87 

Touraine  Old  Style  Italic 79 

■tudor  Black 90 

Whittier 81 

128 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN   USE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

FIVE    POINT   NO.    SIXTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alex- 
ander was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asiaunder  his  hand.    The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 

[Leaded] 

with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conquerors  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  he  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to 
THK  FROZEN  NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NATURAL   LIMITS,    EXCHANGING  THE 

VIROIN  ORES  OF  SpAIN  FOR  THE  LONG-SOUGHT   SPICES  OF  ARABV  THE  BLEST,  WAS  THEREFORE       1234567890 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had    12  3*567890 
SIX   POINT   NO.    FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 

[Leaded] 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
WAS  HINDERED  BY  HIS  EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY 
Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  1234567890 

aspired  to  he  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  1234567890 
AEIOU  XfifoO  AEldO  AElOO  AeIoU  AElOtJ  AcN  ygKS^T 
AEloO  At,t6t  ktibt  AfiioO  AfilOC  aeIoC  A^h55  aeiou  <i616u  &6i6u  aeiflft  afiifttt  aelOQ 
AEIOO  A^tOiy  A£:!diy  AtitOO  AE'ioO  AEIOC  cpHNS  Thhsstz 
aelou  diidu  d,ildii  &HOH  mwii  dcloii  dpn  B8  DI)t>/>^53&Cdhhkfis§tz 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 


SEVEN    POINT   NO.    FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  fii'st  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

[Leaded] 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpect- 
edly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of 
a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening 
frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
CENTURY  MIGHT  INDEED  FEEL  UNEASY  AT  THE  RESULT, 

IF  HE  WERE  NOT,  LIKE  MOST  OF  THE  STOICS,  AN  OPTIMIST      1234567890 

or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  1234567890 
AMot  AEIOt)  Aei6n  aeiou  A^l'Ou  AEIOU  deioil  dewil  AQ 
AElOO  AElOU  hhibh.  iieiou  AktOd  AElOU  Mldii  deiou  &en 
AfilOU     AElOtJ     aeiou      aeiou     A£I6&     AElOtT     dSioU     deioii     aqn 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

EIGHT    POINT   NO    FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was 
no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by 
the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 

[Leaded] 

of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influ- 
ence of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain 
for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no 
very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it 
and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
THAT  IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  Unex- 
pectedly, BY  THE  FOKCE,  NOT  OP  GENIUS,  BUT  OF   12345678  9  0 

circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  12  3  4:567890 

AEIOu  AEiou  AeioC  aiO  A o 0  6  A (; N  c 0  £:^aoAq 

aeC  AEf6tJ  AEiou  Afiou  AEiOu  AEIOU  S  0  aclou  A6i6n  k^ibh  Seloft 
aeiou  hqeho  deiou  d4l6ii  dbldii  dHoU  deioU  dgh 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 

NINE    POINT   NO.    FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influ- 
ence of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 

[Leaded] 

Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diflB- 
cult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
OF  THE  EARLY  DIADOCHI  HAD  EACH  FOR  MANY 

HARD-FOUGHT  YEARS  ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE      1234567890 

successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  icork  1234567890 
AEIOU    A^lCU   AEiot   AEIOU   AElOtI    AEIOU   IgN 

AEIOU     AEfOU     AeIOU     AEIOU     AEIOU     AEIOU     AgHHKNT 

aelou   a^iou   aei5u   aeiou   aeiou   aeioii   afhhknt 
AEIOU  A^IOU  AEIOU  AEIOC  AEIOU  AElOU  Agfi 

deioU    dH6il   dblbii    deiOii    aeioil    aeiou    dgn 
CHHIKSSSTZZaaccdgiino6o68ssuuuyyzz 
H  H  S  T    a  e  e  h  h  i  {  t  s  s  t  u  z    ©  9  d    ^  \>  P    055 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

ELEVEN    POINT    NO.    SIXTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thouglitful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 

[Leaded] 

by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  sys- 
tem of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 
It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
NOT  UNLIKE  THAT  OF  ROME;  FOR  THE  CON- 

QUEST  OF  THE  WeST  WOULD  HAVE  BEEN    12  34:567890 

ito  (lijjicalt  matter  to  Alexander,  icith  1234567890 
AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU   AEIOU  AEIOtJ 

AEiOU     AEIOU      AEIOU     AEIOU     AEIOU      AEIOU      IgHHKNSST 

aeiou    Aei6n    a^iou    aeiou    aeiotl    a^iou     A^hhlvfisst 

AEIOU  AeiOu  Aeiou  Aeiou  aeIou  Aeiou 

nelou    (ieidil    aindu    deiou    aeiou    delou    d  (;,  n 
•d  a  h)  h  c   (1  d   e   c   e  ^   j|  i   i   i  1  1  m   o  o  ^)  p  p  (^ 

q  <1  <1  <i  r  0  t  f  u  z  :?:  z 
A  g  E  H  H  K  H  S  g  T     ACHHNST    hhisstuz 
I)  (^    \)  [)  ( )  ()    5  5  3'^'  '^  ^y>   (1  a  T)  (t i' r  e  i  i  f?  6  o  p  ^0  f  u  ii  a 


8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


OLD  STYLE 

FIVE    POINT    NO.    EIGHTY-THREE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  ot 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexan- 
der was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rume;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
diflicult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
wiih  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 

[Leaded] 

show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the 
frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the 
long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
CONCEIVED  IT  AND  STRIVEN  FOR  IT  CONSCIOUSLY  HAD  FAILED,  WHO  COULD 
HAVE  IMAGINED  THAT   IT  SHOULD   DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  1234567890 

iinexpecleiily,  by  the  force,  not  0/  genius,  but  0/ circumstances,  into  i234l6y8go 

SIX    POINT   NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they 
must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Ale.xander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 

[Leaded] 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Ale,\ander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture, 

A   WORLD-EMPIRE,   INCLUDING    THE    LANDS    AND   NATIONS    ABOUT 

THE  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and         1234567890 

torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  l2345bTSqo 

Q     E     £     N     Aoij     E     E     aioii     aeiou     aeidii     heiou     g     ii 

O     C    deidii    deioit    aei'i     e     aeiou     q 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


OLD  STYLE 

SEVEN    POINT   NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  mat- 
ter to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  wiih  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterra- 
nean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
directions  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid 
strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent 
ENLIGH  I  ENMKNT.  THESE  MATERIAL  GAI.XS  WERE  INDISPUT- 
ABLE, EVEN  THOUGH  A  DANGEROUS  MONOPOLY  WAS  I  23456789O 
beitt^  established  not  merely  throuifh  the  enormous  advan  i2j^^6j8()o 
Q  N  iieioii  aSiflil  i\6i6ii  deiou  aeioii  acioii  9  n 
Q    N    aeioTi     dioii     aelou     Heloii     eiii     aeioii     (     n 


lO  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT   POINT   NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
laiiguage. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.     The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 

[Leaded] 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unex- 
pectedly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands 
of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
SUCH  NATIONAL  QUALITIES  AS  HAD  GAINED  FOR  SPARTA 

PRECEDENCE  AND  RESPECT,  COUPLED  WITH  ACRES-  I  23456789O 

sive  7vars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening     i234S^7Sgo 

AEIOtJ  AEIOU  AEU  AE  AEIOU  A  C  N  S       aeiou  Itiov 
Afeu  AE  aEIou  Acn     aeioii  aeioii  khVoh  a^ioii  aelou  a9n  aaceeo  p  p  9 
AlO  Jei6u  A£U E  AElOU  ACNS    aeioii  detoii  deio/t  deii  dewii  Sffis 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  ii 


OLD  STYLE 

NINE    POINT    NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 

[Leaded] 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE   LANDS 

AND    NATIONS    ABOUT    THE    MEDITERRANEAN       I  23456789O 

Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  i2j4^6-^Sgo 

AEIOU     AEIOU     AEIOO     AEU     AcEN0S 

aeioii     aeiou     d^iou     aeiou     aeioii     ^agno     hhkniesSty 

AEi  Oij    E161J     ae6u     ae6     a{j:n     D«p)> 

Aiou  A£:iu  aeiou  AAceNu 

aeid     deioii     aen     deiou     aeiou     (o 


12  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


OLD  STYLE 

TEN    POINT   NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.     When  Alexander  was  yet  a 

[Leaded] 

young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS 

AND  NATIONS  ABOUT  THE   MeDITERRA-  123456789O 

f/ean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  i  3  3  4  §  6  y  8  g  o 

AEiOUAi6UEEUAEiOUgR§AEi6uAEi6fjEi6tEUAEiou 

a<;n  aei'oii  aeiou  aeiou  aeioii  aeiou  aa(;;nhmfss3/ 
AEIOU  AElOtr  AEIOU  JEIOU  AEIOU  A  (:  E  N $ 
aeiou  deioil  aeioii  aeiou  aeiou  12  dd((tgiinn0suyyh'p 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  13 

OLD  STYLE 

ELEVEN    POINT    NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in 
the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population, 
in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  com- 
mon language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
AGAINST  THE  ADULT  ROME  OF  THE  THIRD 

CENTURY,  FRESH    FROM    HER   SaMNITE    I23456789O 

co7iquests,  show  what  would  have  been  i2j4§6'/8go 

Aeiou  kti6\]  Afeu  E  AEiOu  A  g  N  s 

AEioO  Aeiou  Aeiou  k±i6t  AElou  a^n 

aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aciou   ^fio   hknisy  ^au   a9 

AEIOU  E  AEU  A^IOO  AEIOU  A  g  N 

delou  dciou  aeu  dcidi\  di'idii  a  a  n  ^  o 


14  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE    POINT    NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When 
Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
WOULD    HAVE    BEEN    NO    DIFFICULT 

MATTER  TO  ALEXANDER,         I     23456789O 

wilk  all  the  resources  of        i2j4s6']8go 


A         AAA         ^  \^      \  /^ 


AEiOU    AEIOU     EU     E  A  g  N 

AEioiJ  AEIOU  tu  £  ACN  aeioU  aeiou  aeu  aeioii  a^n 

AEIOU  A^IOU  AEU  EQN 

deidii    dHoii    aeu    dHoii   ffi 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  15 

OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN    POINT   NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius 
saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 

[Leaded] 

directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
WHEN  ALEXANDER  WAS  YET  A 

YOUNG  iMAN  RETURN-        I    23456789O 

ing  from  his  conquests,  i2j4§6j8go 

•  ■        *  »     ...•••  A        A      AAA  v\*  /  O  -«-' 

AEIOU     AEIOU     AEU     E     A    0    N 

AEIOU    A^ioO    AEU    E    A  C  N 

AAAAA  \x\  /r///  r^     r<^     -^  O 

aeiou     aeiou     aeu     aeiou     aon    ago 
O    O    A    u    doit    aeu    dii   a  g  n 


1 6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN    POINT   NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  o"reat  turninof- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 

[Leaded] 

civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law. 

IT   WAS    NOT    THE    FIRST 

TIME  THAT  THIS  I  23456789O 

grand  prospect         J2j4^6y8go 


A         A        A         >*.  \  \ 


AEOU    AEOU    EU    E    A  N 


i 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MONOTYPE 

SIX    POINT    NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  tivilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance 
or  at  war,  distracted  bv  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Ale.xander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  .-Xsia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  Vi-ith  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  vounger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  reahzation  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was 
hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought 
years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging 
the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously 
had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained 
it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained 
for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  secur- 
ing ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's 
Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century  might 
indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not.  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or 
a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the 
world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to 
enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce  with  its 
diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indis- 
putable, even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through 
the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  de- 
struction of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason 
of  favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people  nor  their 
HEN'CE   IT   RESULTED   TH.\T   THE   COMMO.V   PEOPLE   DEGENERATED 

RAPIDLY    INTO    A    VULGAR    MOB,     PURSUING    SOLELY    ITS    MATERIAL        12.3  4  567890 

pleasures,  and  the  dominant  classes,  when  vast  opportunities  of  wealth  1234567890 

AEioiJ        A6t60        AEiou        kt.i6\!       aeIou        A6I60  C  n  C 

aeioii         aeiSu         a^i6u         aeioii         aeiou         aeiCii  c  n 

aeioii         aetoA         aeiou          deiou         aeioii         aHda  (  n 


l8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT    POINT    NO.    THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 
work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 
A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
ANY      POLITICAL      THINKER     WHO     WITNESSED      THIS 

MIGHTY     OUTCOME     OF     HALF     A     CENTURY     MIGHT       1234567890 

indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  m     i2J4j6'/Sgo 

AEioij         AEIOU         AEIOU         AEIOU         AEIOU         AEIOO         f  N  g! 

acioii         aeiou         aeioii         aeiou         aeiou         aeiou         5  n 
iieidii         deioA        aeioii         dcioii        deioil         deidtl         Q  n  Q 
TDK      HHH      SS      ST       ddhhhkssst     HS       dhst     <?l?T? 


I 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  19 


MONOTYPE 

NINE    POINT    NO.    THIRTY  ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Comith,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  con- 
quest of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 
with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.     The  successes  of 


[Leaded] 

Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realiza- 
tion of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEXPECTEDLY,  BY  THE 

FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT  OF  CIRCUMSTANCES,       1234567890 

into  the  hands  oj  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  1234367890 
AEioiJ      .\EioiJ      .\Eiou      AEiotJ      AEiou      a6I6l'      g  x 
aeioii        aeiou        aeioii        aeiou        aeI5u        iglou        i;  n 
deidii        detoil        deioii        dcidu        aeiou        deiou        QnQ 

A         HST     dhst  HST  dhst 


20  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TEN    POINT    NO.  THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  repubhc.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL    THE  LANDS 

AND      NATIONS      ABOUT      THE      MeDITER-      I   23456789O 

ranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North     i2J4§6y8go 

AEiotJ      AEIOU      AEIOU      AEIOU      AEIOU      AeIOU      ?  N  Q 

aeioii      aeiou      aeiou      aeioii      aeiou      aeiou       fano 

deioii     deioit     atiou     deioii     deloil     deidu     gdno        Q 

D  HHH  K  SS  T         d  hhh  k  Ss  t 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  21 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN    POINTInO."tHIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander. 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOPING 

TO  COMPLETE  HIS  WORK  AND  REGEN-      I234567890 

erate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent     i2j4j6y8go 

AE'ioU    AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  g  N  f  HST  A 

aeioii     aeiou     aeiou     aeioii     aclou     aeiou     f  n  dhst 
aeidii     deioit     aeibu     deidu     aeiou     deioii     f  w^ 

HST     dhst 


22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TWELVE    POINT   NO.  THIRTY-ONE 

[Solul] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  REPUBLIC.    AND 

IF     THE     REALIZATION     OF     THE      1234567890 

conquerors  dreams  was  hind-  iz^^^dySgo 
h  5 f fN  ouAou  aeioii  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiiio  5 
d'eidil  deioit  delbu  aeiou  deioU  aeioii    gQii  dhhhksst 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  23 


MONOTYPE 

SIX    POINT   NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  conunon  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning 
from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  l:)een  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources 
of  Asia  imder  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conciuests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with 
his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate 
the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  wild  imagination.  But  while 
those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who 
could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a 
people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such 
national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled 
with  aggressive  wars  imder  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most 
the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.     There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifes 
gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of 
disputes  by  the  arljitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will 
there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  conmierce,  with  its  diffusion, 
not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.     These  material  gains  were 
indisputable,  even  tliough  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established, 
NOT  MERKIA'  THROUGH  ENORMOUS  ADVANTAGES  INSEPARA- 
nLE  FROM  Roman  infi-uence,  but  by  the  jealous         1234567890 
destruction  of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  12  34ii678i)0 

ae         aeioil    aeioil    aeJou    aeioQ     ail       c  aii    a     ij 
ai'iiiu     Aeioil     Ul'lou     di'iiju     delou     fielS     p  an     d 


24-  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN    POINT    NO.    EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 

[Leaded] 

East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  centurj^,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
QUEROR'S    DREAMS    WAS    HINDERED    BY    HIS 

EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY  1234567890 

Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-  1234567890 


aeioii     aeiou     aeioCi     aeiou     aelou     iiei6u     9  fi       a  a  6 
aeloil     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aelou     deidii     q  n       ado 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  25 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT    POINT   CUSHING 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  the 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of 
a  common  language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as 
very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the   younger  and  feebler  republic.     And  if  the   realization   of  the 

[Leaded] 
conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole   successor,   hoping   to   complete   his   work   and   regenerate   the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild 
imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for 
it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should 
drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but 
of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by 
the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-  1234567890 

OF  WEALTH,  BUT  OF  ENLIGHTENMENT.    THESE  MATERIAL 
aeioii    ieiou    aeioii    aeidCi     aeiou     5 


26  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN    POINT   GUSHING 

[Soiur] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  is  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was 
yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the 

[Leaded] 

far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  con- 
quest of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 
army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  12  34567890 
ALL    THE     LAND    AND    NATIONS    ABOUT    THE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  27 


LINOTYPE 

EIGHT    POINT    NO.  ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome  ;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with   his  small   army,    against  the   adult   Rome  of  the   third   century, 

[Leaded] 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the 
conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be 
his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted   world  by   the  potent   influence   of   Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven 
for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it 
should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of 
genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who 
OF  THE  REAL  SETTLEMENT  OF  DISPUTES  BY  THE  ARBI- 

•  TRATION     OF    AN    UMPIRE    WITH     POWER    TO    ENFORCE  1234S6789O 

Ilis  'cvill;  there  rvas  a  consequent  development  of       1234567890 

fill    AEou    AEOU    AEioiJ    aeIou    Q    gfi    aeioii    aeiou    aeioii    aeioij    aeiou 

££  aeiou  aeldii  aeioii  aeiou  g  gn 


28  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

LINOTYPE 

NINE    POINT    NO.  ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popu- 
lation, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.    The  successes  of   Pyrrhus,  with   his  small   army,  against 

[Leaded] 

the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to 
be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regene- 
rate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 
ANY    POLITICAL   THINKER   WHO    WITNESSED    THIS 

MIGHTY    OUTCOME    OF    HALF    A    CENTURY    MIGHT         I23456789O 

indeed  feci  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  zvere      12^4567890 

£fi    1     AEIOU    AEIOU    AEIOiJ    AeIoU     Q 

E&  ae'wu  acioii   deidii  ae'iou  dciou   gn 
£fi  aeiou  aeiou  aeioii  aeioii  aeioii  a  gn 
EB,  dciou  aeloii,  deidii  aeiou  deioU  a  gfi 


I 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  29 

LINOTYPE 

TEN    POINT    NO.  ONE 

[Solul] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man.  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 

[Leaded] 

would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all 
the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of 
the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
(jueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  manv  hard-fought  years 
OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST,  WAS  THEREFORE  NO 

VKRY  WILD  IM.\GIN.\TION.      BUT  WHILE       I23456789O 

those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven     i2^^j6/'8po 
A   £fi  0  AEOU  AEOU  ae:'i()u   aeiou   g 
aeiou  aeioti  aeioii  aeiou  aeiou  aeou  eosgn 
A  ££1  0  dcioii  dcidu  dcidii  dciou  aewil  dcdii  cosgn 


30  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

LINOTYPE 

ELEVEN    POINT    NO.  ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  di- 
rected by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.     When  Alexander 

[Leaded] 

was  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  concjuests  in  the 
far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alex- 
ander, with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOPING  TO  COM- 
PLETE   HIS     WORK     AND   REGENER-       I23456789O 

ate    the    distracted   zvorld    by    the     12^456/8^0 

£fi   AEOIJ   AEOU   AEIOiJ    AEioU    Q 

aeiou  aeiou  aeioii  aeiou  aeiou  e  an  h  g 
deiou  aeloii  d'eidil  dewii  aeiou  e  an  h  g 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  31 

LINOTYPE 

TWELVE   POINT   NO.  ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in 
the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of 
law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When 
Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  an- 
ticipated, as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  REPUB- 
LIC.   AND  IF  THE  REALIZATION      I  23456789O 

of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was    12^4^6/8^0 

il  'id it  aid 
u  ioiji  aio 


32  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popula- 
tion, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  repub- 

[Leaded] 

lie.      And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to 

be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 

world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits, 
exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest, 
was  therefore  no  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
PEACE  THROUGHOUT  THE  WORLD,  OF  THE  REAL  SETTLE- 
MENT OF  DISPUTES    BY  THE  ARBITRATION  OF  AN  I23456789O 

umpire  ivhh  poiver  to  e/iforce  his  ivill;   there  12^4.^6'jSgo 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  33 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 
with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.      The  successes  of 

[Leaded] 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  reali- 
zation of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  as- 
pired to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
THE  LONG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST, 

WAS  THEREFORE   NO   WILD   IMAGINATION.  I      23456789O 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it         I2j4^6'j8g0 


34  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
WITH  HIS  GIANT  GENIUS  AND  ARMA- 

MENTS,  AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER       I23456789O 

^W  feebler  republic.     And  if       i2j^^6'/8go 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  35 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 

[Leaded] 

now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
TO    ALEXANDER,  WITH    ALL    THE 

RESOURCES   OF   AsiA  I    23456789O 

under  his  hand.      'This         I  2  J  4  ^  6  J  8  g  O 


36  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

TWELVE    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predomi- 
nance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.     When 

[Leaded] 

Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alex- 
ander, with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  comiuests,  show 
THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  Re- 
public.      AND  IF  THE  REALIZATION  OF  THE  CON- 

1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  37 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polyb- 
ius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cor- 
inth, they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  pop- 
ulation, in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 

[Leaded] 

one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this 
grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 

MATTER  TO  ALEXANDER,  WIT 

12  34567890 


38 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

[Solid] 

\Vhen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  ot 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  'When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  AVest  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  success  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  ot 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 

[Leaded] 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid 
strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent 
development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion,  not  only  ot  wealth,  but  of 
enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  dan- 
gerous monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous 
advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction 
of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of 
favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people 
nor  their  rulers  had  received  any  education  to  fit  them  for  an  imperial  policy. 
MATERIAL  PLEASURES.  AND  THE  DOMINANT  CLASSES,  WHEN  VAST 
cA    cTW     Ko     r-     r     •ore    sT  1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  39 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations,  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome :  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  suc- 
cesses of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  repulic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early 
Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  he  his  sole 

[Leaded] 

successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagi- 
nation. But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it 
consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of 
circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
directions  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as 
those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia  ? 
THE  MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THROUGHO 
cA     cTW     Rj)     r     r     "Sfe     sT  1234567890 


40  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TEN    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  di- 
rected by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  lan- 
guage. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome:  for  the  conquest  of  the 
W^est  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 

[Leaded] 

with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the 
adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments, 
against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the 
realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each 
for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  suc- 
cessor, hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NAT- 
cyl  cTVl  Ro  r  r  "STe  of  1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  41 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE    POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning -points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
w^as  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect   had   been   held    forth   to   the    world. 

^Leaded] 

When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEB 
zA  zTVL  Kj  r-  y^  We  if  1234567890 


42  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PORSON  GREEK 

SIX    POINT 

TaSe  fie  /xot  Trarro)?,  6(/)»7,  Kpot(7e,  Ae^or  ttu)?  a7ro/3e^>jKe  ra  e/c  roO  et*  AeA</)oi9  XP'?" 
arriplov  trot  •y*ip  ^^  Ae'-yexat  ndw  ye  TeOepairevaOai  6  'AttoAAojm  Kai  o"e  TTcti'Ta  €Ke(Vfa> 
Treifld/nei'Oi'  TrpaxTeti'.  'Ej3ovA6;ur)>'  di/,  w  Kupe,  outms  e^eti''  I'Ci'  fie  Trai'Ta  Tavavria 
€vdv<;  e^  af3\r]';  npaTTttyv  npO(j'Y]i'e\9r]v  toj  'XttoWoji'l.  Uto^  Sd;  e4>y]  6  Kupo?  •  fitfiaffxe* 
Trai'v  -yap  Trapafio^a  Ae'yet?.  'Ort  Trpatroi'  fxei',  e»/>ij,  ajueArJcra?  epoJTCii'  rbi'  Oebi'  e't  Tt  efieo- 
ja>;i',  a7^e7^etptlJ/lrJ^'  auToy  et  fiucatro  aA7j(?eueti', 

EIGHT    POINT 

Td5e  de  fxoi  TrdvTws,  'i<p'q,  Xs.polae,  Xe^oc  TrtDs  airo^e^tjKe  to.   eK  tov   iv 

.  Ae\<f>o2s  xpTjtTTijpioir   (Tol  yap  5r]  Xeyerat  ttclvv  ye  Tedepa.irevo'da.L  b   AirbWuv 

Kai  <T€  irdvTa  iKeivip  ■KtLdbp.evov  vpaTTeiv.     ' E^ovT^ofxriv  &p,  (3  KOpe,  ovtws 

e^e"'"    vvv  8^  irdvTa   rdvavTia   evdus    e^    dpxv^    wpdrruov    Trpoartv^x^V  "'"V 

AttSWcovl.      IIuJs  5^;   e^rj  6  Kvpos  ■    didaffKe-    wdw  yap  wapddo^a  \eyeis. 

TEN     POINT 

Tabe  0£  /AOt  Travrws,  e</)'>^,  T^pdiae,  Xt^ov  ttios  aTro/SelSrjKe  ra  e/< 
TOV  €v  AeA.<^oTs  y^p-qfTT-qptov  •  aol  yap  Srj  Ac'yerat  Travu  ye  reOtpa- 
wevaOaL  6  AttoAAoiv  Kai  ere  iravTa  iK€iV(o  7rtL06p.tvov  TrpaTTeiv. 
E/3ov\6[xriv  av,  w  KCpe,  ourw?  f'x'-'''' '  ''*'"'  ^^  Travra  ravavTM  ev6v<; 
it    oip)(rj<i   TTpaTTMV   ivpoa-qvixO-qv   tw    'AttoAAwvi        Hois  Se';    S  c  <? 

ELEVEN     POINT 

Ta'Se  Se  yu.ot  Trayro)?,  e<^?7,  K/Jotae,  Xe^ov  tto)?  cnro/Se/SrjKe 
TO,  eK  TOV  iv  AeA(^ot?  '^^^prjcrTrjpiov  aol  yap  8r)  XeyeTai  irdvv 
ye  redepairevadai  6  ' AttoXXqjv  Kai  ere  ircivTa  eKeivo)  TretOo- 
fjievov  Trpdrreiv.     'E^ovX6fMi]v  dv,  w  KOjOe,  ovrw^         k   ^   '^ 

TWELVE    POINT 

Ta8e  8e  /xot  7rdvT0j<;,  Cfprj,  Kpotcre,  Xe^ov  770)9  ciTro- 
^e^r}K€  TO.  eK  tov  ev  AeXt^ot?  ^^piqcTTrjpLov  aol  yap 
817  Xeyerat  Trdvv  ye  TedepaTrevadai  6  AiroXXojv  Kai 
ere  navTa   eVeiVw  Treidopievov  irpaTTeiv.      'E^ovkofx-qv 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  43 

ANTIQUE  GREEK 

EIGHT    POINT 

Td8€  Ss  |ioi  iravTtos,  i^r\,  Kpot<j-€,  Xe^ov  ttus  diToPe'PTiKe  to,  Ik  tov 
ev  A€\({>ois  xpT|crTTipiovp  •  crol  -ydp  5t|  Xe'-yerai  irdvu  yt  T60€paiT£{)(r6ai  6 
AiroXXwv  Kai  <r€  iravTa  €K€ivu)  ireiGofievov  irpdrTeiv.  EpovXojii^v  dv,  <!> 
Kvp6,  ovTcos  'i\i^v  '  vOv  hi  irdvTa  rdvavTia  eviGiis  e^  dpxT|S  irpaTTWv  irpoo-- 
■qv«x0T]v  Tw  'AiToXXtovi.      IlaJs    5€  J    'i^r]  6  Kvpos '    8i8ao-K€  •   irdvu  ^dp 

ELEVEN     POINT 

Td5€  5c  |xoi  irdvTws,  €<|>-ri,  Kpoio-e,  \€|ov  irws  dTropep-qKe 
rd  €K  TOV  €v  A€\<|)OLS  xP'n<'"'"nP^°^ '  ^°^  7°-P  ^^  Xe'yeTaL 
T7dvu  Y€  TcBcpaTrevo-SaL  6  '  AttoWcdv  Kai  o-€  TrdvTa  €K€ivw 
Tr6L06|X€vov  TTpdTTtiv.     '  EpouX6|j.T|v   dv,  w  Kvpe,  outcos 

INSCRIPTION  GREEK 

TEN    POINT 

PH5ANTApYI^PA4>YAAZAOTA 
TTAN|iAf=i'^YPA<}'YAAINTA 

TAMie¥^ANTAAEKATTpTZY5ANTA^X 
QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC^^IAO^EBA^TOY 

HEBREW 

SIX    POINT 

rnnV  idi-qi  msDn  nnb  :  bsiir^  Tibb'  nm"p  nb'biij  ■'bir-a 

J       ■     T    :  AT  J  T    :     T  -  J  -  T  I"     T     :■'•.•     V  >.■    T        '    V  J  ;  ■  ■      :         I 

nnb    :n^m23u^  "jSTiJia^  pii  bsirn  idto  nnpb    :n;^2  ^n-ai? 

J-  T  l\    T    r*  T      :      ■  I       V  ;v  a-     t      -  J-  -  »  -t  t.  n  *       i 

rn:-!  npb  aoi^n  nsn  yiaTiJ-^  :n72TTai  ny^  nybV  n^ny  D-'snDb 

'  T   :  (  -  A.-  V      J  :  T    T  ■.  J  -       :      ■  rr  ■     ;  -   j  -  -  -  :  at     :  t  j  t     : 

NINE     POINT 

'^zrc'^  rrij-  rwib  :  bi<^'z^  Tibi  in-o.  n'^'b-i  ^b-z^i 

At  -jt  :    T  --1'  T  ,■     T   :     •       1  V  V  A"  r      '  ■■■  -■        :  "    ;     '^ 

tsz-z^  pi::  bsiiDH  xt2  nrpb    :nr2  "T^i<  VhnS 

T     :    •  '     V  ,v  A"    :    -  J"  -'-TV  IT     •  /■•    :     •         '     •    t  : 


44  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


NESTORIAN  SYRIAC 

NINE    POINT 

}_^£,'aH    ,]^)_^_:i»  l-.Ja-»  llliji.  j^r^o  >^'^j^*^  rr^^^  4=^® 

ARABIC 

NINE    POINT 

kjLir  ^y  ^  L^ti  J^^  y.  ^Jul  ju-  ^d^^  jUJi 

ETHIOPIC 

NINE    POINT 

yT-C  :  fljnjf  rfi  :  avif-'iS  :  tof  ^<!  :  ^'i^C  :  A:t'i^<!i.?*ft  :  fo 
fi.a,  :  hlH  :  ^'^OC  :  fDj&l^gffD-  ;  croiiXj  :  Iftflh  :  ffol?^ 
t :  rt'^i't  :  n^A  :  KVMh-adhC  :  •00-^1  :  XA  :  ?Ai^J. :  A^ 
nffo- :  aa)^^  :  X7a;i-nrh,C  :  XAff"  :  A.^A-A  :  hCA•^A  :  -(IX^  : 
ffD^li.  :  9Ay"  :  HAAtCA?  :  A/^P  :  A-OX  :  X'JH  :  XVUh-tttty 
C  :  m^h-V  :  M  :  A-OX  :  ha^  :  S^'^'i  '•  AflA :  (DYiod  ;  yoa):^J : 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  45 

MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNS 

SIX    POINT 

=     =     +     +     --^X±<^     +     ^S     =     °'»/#]J^ 

EIGHT    POINT 

-H ^x±o  ©  A<n:  ::^±  /±i/'#'- •'  -"'"/tts  ?^"fi 

NINE    POINT 

=  +  --^x<±-L=:   ::--/<]]"'  ".'f?nAi/f 

TEN    POINT 

=   +    --^X<AA^:::-±=l=*   =   ^^ 

i/  f  V  X  ^  =  ^  ^  ^  °  '  "  °  :  :  ^  /  d  V  C^  J 

Q   5  T    ^''   m   ®   n    ^   V3  -?   }^   TTg 
"^^//    II      I     X 

ELEVEN    POINT 

=    +    -^X<An:     ::    -^    ±    V'    f   /  <]\ 

FIVE    POINT  SEVEN     POINT  TWELVE    POINT 

-     =     +  =      +      -      +      X°'"#  o/«^CDri 


46  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

When   thoughtful   Greeks   like    1234 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT   THE 


TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtful  3456 
THE  EIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thoug  7890 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  47. 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 

When  th  1234 
THEFIRST 


CASLON"  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 


Whefi  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  I  ^J^f. 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO    POINT 


JVhen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  56J8 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TEWNTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  goi2 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THJ 


THIRTY    POINT 


IV HEN  thoughtfu  3456 


48  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

NO.  8  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-TWO    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gre  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWBXTT-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtfu  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thoug  9012 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FOKTY-FODB    POINT 


When  th  345 
THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  49 

NO.  8  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

TWENTY-TWO    POINT 

IVhen  thoughtful  Gr  12J4 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO     POINT 


When  thou  go  12 
THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  tho245 

THE  FIRST 

ELZEVIR  ITALIC 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  ^  T>  OA  ^  %  1234^ 


so  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD     12345 

NINE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H   67890 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  12345 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G  67890 

SIXTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G  1234 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  5678 


TWENTY    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  T  9012 


TWENTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  T  3456 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIM  7890 


TWENTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI  1234 


i 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  5^ 


CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

THIRTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  5678 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


THE  FIRS  9012 


FORTY    POINT 


THE  FIR  3456 


EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thought  123 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO     POINT 


When  tho  45 
THE  FIRST  I 


52  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  78 
THE   FIR 


FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth  12345 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

SEVEN    POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   HELD 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carth  12345 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE    POINT  • 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly  1234^ 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE        53 


FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 


FOURTEEN     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  6789 

SIXTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1234 

TWENTY    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  ^678 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  901 


THIRTY    POINT 


THE  FIRST  Tl  234 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


THE  FIRST  56 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


TH§  Fl  78 


SIXTY    POINT 


THR  901 


54  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  mu    1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Ca   I  2345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  the  f  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

ACCENTED    LETTERS — SIX    TO    TWELVE    POINT 

AAA    EELEE   Hi    ooo  uOu  g  N 

aaaa     eeee     iiii     oooo     uuuu     5     n 


CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polvbius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT    POINT 

IVhen  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of    1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN|USE  55 

CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyhius  1234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GR 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greek  90 1 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtful  1908 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thought  190 


SPECIAL    CHARACTERS — ALL    SIZES 


ACCENTED    LETTERS — SIX    TO    TWELVE    POINT 

A     E     6     0    ISl 

a  d  d  d     e  e  e     i  i  i     6  6  6  6     u  u  u  u     q     n 


56  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  WIDE 

SIX    POINT 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Co   1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hke  Polybius  saw  the  fa   12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPEC 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FODRTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  1  234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  lik  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

TWENTY-FODR    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Gr  90 1  2 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  57 

CHELTENHAM  WIDE 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thoughtful  345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  though  678 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thou  90 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  tho  1 2 

ACCENTED    LETTERS — SLX    TO    TWELVE    POINT 

AAA   EEE  iii  oo   uOu   g   N 

aaaa     eee     ii     666     uuuii     q     n 


58  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT    HAD  BEEN  HELD  F 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Polybius  saw  t    12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  Hke  Po  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

TWENTY-rOUB    POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  901 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  59 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtf  234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thoug  567 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thou  89 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  th  23 

THE  FIRST 


6o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD 


SIXTY    POINT 

When  14 

THE  FIR 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 


When 

THE  FI 


ACCENTED    LETTERS — SIX    TO   TWELVE    POINT 

AAA    EEEE    ill    OOO    OUU    C    N 
aaaa     eeee    iiii    oooo    uuuu    ^    n 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  6i 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 

SIX    POINT 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  a  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P    1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  T 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful    9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


62  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thought  345 

THE  FIRST  TIME ' 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thou  678 

THE  FIRS  T  TI 

ACCENTED    LETTERS — SIX    TO    TWELVE    POINT 

Add     e     I     O  6  6     U  u  ii     N  n 


CLARENDON 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  an  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GKAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL 

NINE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

ELEVEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  12345 
THE  FIRST   TIME  THAT  THE    GRAND  PR 

SEVEN    POINT    FIGURES 

1234567890 


IONIC 

SIX    POINT 


"When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GKAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  63 


DELLA  ROBBIA 

SIX     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they   1  2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN   SET   FORTH 


EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN  S 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  o  12343 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybi  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

\A/hen  thoughtful  Greeks  li  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TWENTY-FOUR     POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


64  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BELLA  ROBBIA 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thought  3456 

THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thou  789 

THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-TWO    POINT 


When  tho  123 
THE  FIRST  I 


rORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  th  45 

THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  6  s 


JENSON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 


TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSP 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa    12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  6789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  though  567 

THE  FIRST  TI 


66  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

JENSON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sanv  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa«ru  the  fa.ll  of  Carth  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN    POINT 

Wfien  thoughtful  Greeks  tike  Potyhius  sa%>  the  fait  o  t2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa   67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  tike  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


TWENTT-rOUK    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  thoughtfu  90t2 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  67 

JENSON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

THIRTY-SIX    POINT 

When  though  3456 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  thou  56 

THE  FIRST 


SPECIAL   CHARACTERS — ALL  SIZES 


c/l'B'D3'SM9^'P%'TV 

BOLD-FACE  ITALIC 

SIX    POINT 

WUrn  thoiif/htfnl  (irctk.s  Iik<-  I'ohjbiii.s  .saw  the  full  of  Cai'th     l'i:i4,'i 
THE  FIRST  TIJIE  THAT  THE  GRAND  rROSI'ECT  HAD  BEEN 

NINE    POINT 

Whftt  thotff/hfful  Gvf'f'hs  lihe  Polt/bhis  saw  th  (tlSUit 
THE  FIllST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  riiOSrE 

OLD  STYLE  ANTIQUE 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


68  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


GUSHING  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  tall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cori  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 


SEVEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 


EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD   BEE 

NINE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carth  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD    BEE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD 

ELEVEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  t  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND    PROSPE 

FOURTEEN    POINT    NO.    ONE 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  6789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  69 

GUSHING  OLD    STYLE 

FOURTEEN    POINT    NO.    TWO 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  1 5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


TWENTT-rOUR    POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  901 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIETT-SIX    POINT 


When  thottg  234 
THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


When  tho  56 
THE  FIRST 


70  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PONTIAC 

SIX    POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  mu  12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth.  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greel(s  \\h  Polybius  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  90 1 2 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  71 

PONTIAC 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


THIHTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


ENGRAVER'S  BOLD 


SIX    POINT 

NO.  ONE 
TIIK  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TIIK  <;RANI)  PROSPKCT  HAD   BEKN   HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  M'ORI-    1S34S 

NO.  TWO 
Tllli:    FIKST    Tl.MK    THAT    THK    GHAND    PROSPECT     HAD    ItEEN     HELD     FORTH     0T800 

NO.    THREE 
Tllli    FIRST    TIMK    THAT    THE    CRAND    PROSPECT     HAD     UKEX      13348 

NO.    FOUR 

THE   FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE    GRAND    I'ROSPECT    CrsOO 

NO.    FIVE 

TIIH    FIRST   TIMK  Til ^VT  THE  OK.VNI>  1»1«    Iti.'M.^ 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT  THE    6T890 


72  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CENTURY  EXPANDED 

SIX    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL  12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT   THE   GRAND   PROSPECT  67890 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO  12345 

ELEVEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  67890 

TWELVE     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAN  12345 


FOURTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1234 


EIGHTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  5678 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  9012 

THIRTY    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TI  345 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE         73 
POST  OLD  STYLE 

SIX    POINT 

IVHen  thou^Htftil  Greeks  like  Polybitis  s^-w  12345 
THE  FIR^T  TIME   THAT   THE    GRAND    PR.OSPE 

EIGHT    POINT 

VTKen  tHoug'Ktful  GreeRs  liKe  Poly-   67890 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE    GRAND    P 

TEN    POINT 

W^Ken  thoug'Ktful  Greeks  liR  12345 
THE  FIRST  time:  THAT    THE    G 

TWELVE    POINT 

WHen  tKougKtful  Greeks  0789O 
THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  1234 
THE  FIRvST  TIME  TM 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

When  thoug'  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  THO 

SPECIAL    CHARACTERS — ALL    SIZES 

U/ye    o/    dl    f 


74  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

DE  VINNE 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD   FO 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD   B 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  67890 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TEWNTY-FOUK    POINT 

When  thoughtful  567 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY    POINT 


When  though  890 
THE    FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  75 


DE  VINNE 

THIRTY-SIX    POINT 

When  thou  i3 
THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-TWO    POINT 


When  th  34 
THE  FIRST 


SIXTY    POINT 


When  15 
THE   FI 


76  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DE  VINNE 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 

Whei6 
THE 

Wh 
VISE 


I 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  77 


DE  VINNE 


NINETY-SIX    POINT 

Oh  8 
HIM 


ONE-HDNDRED-AND-TWENTY    POINT 


78  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DE  VINNE  CONDENSED 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 

When 


NINETY-SIX    POINT 


The 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY    POINT 


His  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  79 


TOURAINE  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 


SIX    POINT 


When  Ihoughlfut  Greeks  like  Volybius  saw  Itje  fall  of  Carl hage  and  of  Corin  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 


EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  "Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carth  6y8go 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  'PROSPECT  HAD 

TEN     POINT 

When  ttiougktful  Gzeeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  IIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  TROS 

TWELVE     POINT 

When  tkougktful  Greeks  like  T'oiybius  sa  6y8go 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

WHEN  Thoughtful  Gree  1284 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

WHEN  Thought  56'j8 

THIRTY    POINT 

When  thought  go  12 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


When  thou  231 


8o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LIGHT  FACE  GOTHIC 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyblu3  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they     12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD    BEEN    HELD   FORTH   TO 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD    BEEN    HE 

SIX    POINT    COMBINATION    GOTHIC    NO.    ONE-HUNDRED-AND-SIXTY-THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD  12345 


GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  th  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  TH 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HE 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall   12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD     | 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  6789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


TWENTY-TWO    POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  8l 


COPPERPLATE 

SIX    POINT 

NO      ONE 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD    BEEN    HELD   FORTH    TO   THE   WOR    12345 

NO.    TWO 
THE    FIRST    TIME    THAT    THE    GRAND    PROSPECT    HAD    BEEN    HELD    FORTH    67890 

NO.    THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN  H  12345 

NO.    FOfR 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND    PROSPECT   67890 

TWELVE     POINT 

NO.    ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR    12345 

NO.    IWO 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GR   67890 


WHITTIER 

TWELVE     POINT 
NO.    THREE 


THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT     12345 

NO.    FOUR 

THE   FIRST  TIME   T    6789 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1234 

NO.    TWO 

THE  FIRST  T  1678 


BLACK  GOTHIC 

SIX     POINT    BLACK    GOTHIC 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyblus  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corin  67890 


82  THE  UNIVE^^  ,TY  OF  CHICAGO  i-RESS 


LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORL  1234567890 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WOR  12345 

TEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  67890 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  12345 

FODRTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA  6789 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  5678 


THIRTY    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  90 1 2 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  3456 


FORTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  789 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYi        IN  USE  8t, 


LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 

THE  FIRST  Tl  123 


SIXTY    POINT 


THE  FIRST  145 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT 


THE  FIRST  6 


MONARCH 

SIXTY    POINT 


When  12 
THE  FIR 


84  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


.      INTERCHANGEABLE  GOTHIC 

SIX    POINT 

NO.    ONE 

THE  HRST  TIME  THAT  THE   GRAND    PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN    HELD     FORTH    TO    THE    WORLD     1Z34S 

NO.    TWO 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   HELD   FORTH  TO  THE    67890 

NO.  THREE 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HELD     12345 

NO.    FOUR 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE    67890 

NO.    FIVE 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPE     12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND    P  67890 

TEN     POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR    1234 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  567 


EIGHTEEN     POINT 

THE   FIRST  TIM   89 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

THE   FIRST  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  85 

SLOPING  GOTHIC 

SIX    POINT    (agate    face) 

THE  FIRST  TIME   THAT   THE  QRANO  PROSPECT    1 2345 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  lihe  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  Corinth  12346 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  OF  CARTHAGE  AND  OF  CORIN 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD    FORTH    TO    THE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  lihe  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cartha  67890 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
THE  FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN   HELD 

TEN     POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  12345 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  67390 
THE  FIRST   TIME    THAT    THE   GRAND    PROSPECT   HAD 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  12345 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  saw  the  fall  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  PROSPECT  HAD  B 


ADVERTISING  FIGURES 

EIGHTEEN     POINT    NO.    ONE 


1234567890 

EIGHTEEN     POINT    NO.    TWO 

12    3    4    5    6   7   8   9   0 


THIRTY    POINT 


1234567890 


86  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LITHO  ROMAN 

SIX    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cart    12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD    BEE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the     67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

When  thoughtful  G   5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

When  though  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  87 

TITLE 

NINE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  12345 

ELEVEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G  67890 

TWELVE    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH   1234 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  5678 

SIXTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  901 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  234 

TWENTY    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  567 

TWENTY-TWO    POINT 

THE  FIEST  TIM  890 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI 123 


CONDENSED  TITLE 

EIGHT    POINT 

When  tlioiiii'litful  Greeks  like  Polybiiis  saw  the  fall  of  C  1908 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN    POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR    1908 


88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE    POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory»   There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSP 


NEW  MODEL  REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.   There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  na- 
tions hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  gov  67890 
THE  i^IRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  89 

ENGRAVER'S  OLD  ENGLISH 

SIX     PllINT 

VSiftn  tiiaugi;tfu(  (SrrrhB  likr  PolybhiB  aaui  ttfe  fall  of  (ilartl;agr  and  (£atxn  12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

]pit  titiiuglitful  (^rttka  like  J^oliibiuji  aaui  ll|p  fall  nf  (Cartljage  BrB90 

TEN     POINT 

l?n  tl)nugl|tful  drrrks  likr  J^olybtus  aafo  tl|p  fall  12345 

TWELVE     POINT 

}m  tl^oitrjl^tful  (Brrrka  likr  Polybtus  saui  Br890 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

Wiim  tlimtglitful  (Bmks  Uk?  Pnlybtus  1234 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

liljfn  tijnugljtful  (i«f ka  likf  50ra 


TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 


tl^tt  tl|0«gl|tful  (Sr?  9012 


THIRTY    POINT 


i^m  tIj0U5l|tful  3450 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


IjFntl|0ug  ZSSH 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


\)m  tlj0 1 Z3 


90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BRADLEY  TEXT 

I 


TEN     PDINT 


UIDen  tbougbtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tDe  fall  of  12345 

TWELVE     POINT 

mben  ibougbtful  6reeK$  like  Polybius  saw  tb  12545 

EIGHTEEN     POINT 

Ulben  tbougbtful  6reek$  liKe  Pol  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

^fben  tbougbtful  Greek  5^7$ 


TUDOR  BLACK 

SIX    POINT 

IWlbcn  tbougbtful  Orccfes  Uf!C  ipolvbius  saw  tbe  fall  of  Cartbage  an^  Corint  12345 

EIGHT    POINT 

Mbcn  tbougbtful  ©reel^s  lihe  ipol^blus  saw  tbc  fall  67890 

TEN    POINT 

mubcn  tbouabttul  (BreeF?s  UU  pol^bius   12345 

TWELVE    POINT 

Mbcn  tbougbtful  6reel^9  lil^c  pol^  67890 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

Mben  tbouobtful  (Brechs  1234 

TWENTY    POINT 

Mben  tbougbtful  (5  5678 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


"Mlben  tbou  9012 


'  SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  91 


PRIORY  TEXT 

EIGHT    POINT 

Whtn  tbougfttful  <!Brceh^  like  polpbiu?  jsatii  tbe  fan  of  Cartftage    12345 

TEN     POINT 

W\ttn  t|)attffl)tful  (0recfe6  litie  fjolpbittfi;  gato  tbc  fall  of  67890 

TWELVE     POINT 

W\)en  t^ouglitful  ^reefeg  lifer  pol^biu0  gato  t\)  1 2345 

FOURTEEN    POINT 

Wi)tn  tlioujjlitful  (B!recft0  Ufee  jBol^  6789 

EIGHTEEN    POINT 

1^1)en  t!)oug|)tful  Greeks  Itk  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR    POINT 

W\)tn  tl)0U!jl)tful  6^ree  5078 


THIRTY    POINT 


W\)m  t!)oug!)tfuI  90X2 


THIRTY-SIX    POINT 


Wlitn  tljous  3456 


SIX    POINT    BLACK    NO.    THIRTEEN 

WLl)cn  tijougfttful  (Grrr ks  likr  iaolnbius  sata  tl)f  fall  of  Cartljagr  anB  of  Corint   123.'45 


TWELVE    POINT   ENGLISH 


ffl2at)en  tjougbtful  (Wrecks  lifte  JjJolfitius  sail) 


92  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


BRASS  CIRCLES 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


93 


INITIALS 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT    DELLA   ROBBIA 


^ 

riMM 

IW'*' 

^/7|Yj^o 

w 

^t^W 

% 

^^k 

M 

}^^ 

i 

=|m 

i' ' 

^^^m 

v^ 

SIXTY    POINT   ROYCROFT 


94  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 


SIXTY    POINT    ROYCROFT 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


95 


INITIALS 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT    BURFORD 


^^^^p 

(^B) 

_^^ 

w 

^m 

96 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 


SEVENTY-TWO    POINT    BURFORD 


THIRTY    POINT    JENSON 


^^ 


IB  66372 


25^'7/f 


Z  1^5-3 
131  D 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


